<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<Search><pages Count="244"><page Index="1"><![CDATA[2022 Yamaha Boat

                                                   AR210 / SX210


                                       212 / 212S / 212SE


                         212SD / 212XE / 212XD







                                OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL























                                                                              U.S.A. Edition



                               Read this manual carefully                      LIT-18626-13-49
                         before operating this boat.
                                                                                  F3R-F8199-15]]></page><page Index="2"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 1  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM




















                                              WARNING:
                                                                             Operating, servicing
                                         and maintaining a recreational marine
                                         vessel can expose you to chemicals
                                         including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
                                         phthalates, and lead, which are known to
                                         the State of California to cause cancer and
                                         birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
                                         minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
                                         service your vessel in a well-ventilated area
                                         and wear gloves or wash your hands
                                         frequently when servicing this vessel.
                                         For more information go to
                                         www.P65warnings.ca.gov/marine

























                        Read this manual carefully before operating this boat. This manual should stay
                        with the boat if it is sold.]]></page><page Index="3"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 1  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                    Important manual information

                                  To the owner                     Engine data recording
                        Thank you for choosing a Yamaha boat. This  This model’s ECM stores certain engine data
                        owner’s/operator’s manual contains informa-  to assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions and
                        tion you will need for proper operation, main-  for research, statistical analysis and develop-
                        tenance, and care. A thorough understanding  ment purposes.
                        of these simple instructions will help you to  Although the sensors and recorded data will
                        obtain maximum enjoyment from your new  vary by model, the main data points are:
                        Yamaha. If you have any questions about the  ● Engine status and  engine  performance
                        operation or maintenance of  your boat,  data
                        please consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.  This data will be uploaded only when a spe-
                        In this manual, information of particular im-  cial Yamaha diagnostic tool is attached to the
                        portance  is distinguished in the following  engine, such as when maintenance checks or
                        ways:                                 service procedures are performed.
                                                              Yamaha will not disclose this data to a third
                            This is the safety alert symbol. It is used  party except in the following cases. In addi-
                        to alert you to potential personal injury haz-  tion, Yamaha may provide engine data to a
                        ards. Obey all safety messages that follow  contractor in order to outsource services re-
                        this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.  lated to the handling of the engine data. Even
                                                              in this case, Yamaha will require the contrac-
                             WARNING
                                                              tor to properly handle the engine data  we
                        A WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-  provided and Yamaha  will appropriately
                        tion which, if not avoided, could result in  manage the data.
                        death or serious injury.              ● With the consent of the boat owner
                                                              ● Where obligated by law
                         NOTICE                               ● For use by Yamaha in litigation
                        A NOTICE  indicates special precautions  ● For general  Yamaha-conducted research
                        that must be taken to avoid damage to the  purposes when the data is not related to an
                        boat or other property.                individual engine or owner

                        TIP:
                        A TIP provides key information to make pro-
                        cedures easier or clearer.]]></page><page Index="4"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 2  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Important manual information



                        Because Yamaha has a policy of continuing
                        product improvement, this product may not
                        be exactly as described in this owner’s/oper-
                        ator’s manual. Specifications are subject to
                        change without notice.
                        This manual should be considered a perma-
                        nent part of this boat and should remain with
                        it even if the boat is subsequently sold.


                          AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S / 212SE /
                                212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                           OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL
                          ©2022 by Yamaha Motor Corporation,
                                       U.S.A.
                                 1st Edition, May 2021
                                  All rights reserved.
                           Any reprinting or unauthorized use
                            without the written permission of
                           Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                                is expressly prohibited.
                                   Printed in U.S.A.
                                 P/N LIT-18626-13-49]]></page><page Index="5"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 1  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Table of contents

                        General and important labels...........1  Control function operation.............. 41
                          Identification number records..........1  Boat control functions ................... 41
                            Primary Identification (PRI-ID)      Engine shut-off switch................ 41
                             number.......................................1  Battery switch
                            Hull Identification Number (HIN) ...1  (AR210 / SX210) ...................... 42
                            Engine serial numbers...................1  Battery switches
                          Emission control information ...........3  (except for AR210 / SX210) ..... 42
                            Approval labels of emission          Main switches (AR210 / SX210 /
                             control certificate .......................3  212 / 212S) .............................. 43
                            Manufactured date labels             Main switch (212SE / 212SD /
                             (AR210 / SX210).........................4  212XE / 212XD)........................ 44
                            Manufactured date labels             “START/STOP” buttons
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) .......4   (212SE / 212SD / 212XE /
                            Star labels (4-star models) ............5  212XD) ..................................... 44
                          Important labels ...............................7  Remote control levers................. 44
                                                                 Throttle/shift paddles
                            Warning labels ............................11
                            Other labels.................................15  (212SD / 212XD) ...................... 47
                                                                 Steering ...................................... 47
                                                                 Tilt lever ...................................... 48
                        Safety information...........................16
                          Limitations on who may operate
                                                              Instrument operation ....................... 50
                            the boat.......................................16
                                                               Helm controls (AR210 / SX210) ..... 50
                          Cruising limitations.........................17
                                                                 Tachometers............................... 51
                          Operational requirements ..............18  Accessory outlet......................... 51
                          Required equipment.......................20  Audio control keypad.................. 51
                          Additional equipment                   Multi-function display unit
                                                                   operation.................................. 52
                            recommendations .......................20
                                                               Multi-function display elements..... 53
                          Hazard information.........................21
                                                                 Screen tab bar ............................ 54
                          Boat characteristics .......................21
                                                                 Center display............................. 54
                          Night operation ..............................22  Warning bar ................................ 55
                          Wakeboarding and water-skiing ....23  Home screen ................................. 56
                          Rules of the road............................24  Trip screen..................................... 56
                          To get more boating safety           Setting screen................................ 57
                            information ..................................28  Time setting screen .................... 57
                          Enjoy your boat responsibly...........28  Brightness setting screen........... 58
                                                                 Unit setting screen...................... 58
                                                                 Depth alarm setting screen......... 59
                        Description.......................................29
                                                                 Maintenance setting screen ....... 59
                          Boat glossary .................................29  Language setting screen ............ 60
                          Location of main components .......30  Factory reset screen................... 60
                            Exterior components...................30  Warnings........................................ 61
                            Seats ...........................................33  Check engine warning ................ 62
                            Stern components ......................34  Low oil pressure warning............ 62
                            Helm components.......................35  Over temperature warning.......... 62
                            Engine components ....................38  Battery voltage warning.............. 63
                                                                 Communication error warning .... 63]]></page><page Index="6"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 2  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Table of contents

                            Low fuel level warning.................64  Home screen ................................. 78
                            Depth warning.............................64  Map screen.................................... 78
                            No-wake mode/cruise assist         Trip screen..................................... 79
                             switch.......................................64
                            Operating the boat with a          Media screen ................................. 80
                             minimal wake                        Radio screen (AM/FM)................ 81
                             (no-wake mode) .......................64  Bluetooth screen ........................ 81
                            Operating the boat at a steady       Auxiliary screen........................... 83
                             speed (cruise assist) ................65  USB screen................................. 83
                            Operating the boat in reverse        Main audio setting screen .......... 84
                             with more thrust                  System control screen................... 86
                             (reverse RPM control) ..............65  Setting screen................................ 87
                            Light operation............................66  Time setting screen .................... 87
                            Turning the courtesy light on or     Brightness setting screen........... 87
                             off.............................................66  Language setting screen ............ 88
                            Turning the anchor light and         Unit setting screen...................... 88
                             bow light on or off....................66  Depth alarm setting screen......... 88
                            Horn switch.................................67  Maintenance setting screen ....... 89
                            Ventilating the engine               Factory reset screen................... 89
                             compartment............................67  Warnings........................................ 91
                            Draining the bilge water ..............67  Check engine warning ................ 93
                            Switch circuit breakers ...............67  Low oil pressure warning............ 93
                          Helm controls (212 / 212S) ............68
                                                                 Over temperature warning.......... 93
                            Accessory outlet .........................69  House/Start Battery voltage
                            Horn switch.................................69  warning .................................... 94
                            Remote control keypad...............69  Communication error warning .... 94
                            Bilge pump indicator light...........69  Low fuel level warning ................ 94
                          USB charger...................................70  Depth warning ............................ 94
                          Multi-function display unit          Helm controls (212SE / 212SD /
                            operation.....................................70  212XE / 212XD)........................... 95
                            Touching the multi-function          Accessory outlet......................... 96
                             display......................................70  Switch panel ............................... 96
                            Using the joystick........................70  Multi-function display unit
                          Operation buttons ..........................72  operation..................................... 97
                            Controller ....................................72  Touching the multi-function
                            Operating the boat at a steady         display ..................................... 97
                             speed (cruise assist) ................72  Using the joystick ....................... 97
                            Operating the boat with a          Operation buttons.......................... 98
                             minimal wake                        Controller.................................... 98
                             (no-wake mode) .......................73  Multi-function display elements... 101
                            Operating the boat in reverse
                             with more thrust                    Screen tab bar .......................... 102
                             (reverse RPM control) ..............73  Status indicator bar .................. 103
                          Multi-function display elements.....74  Operation mode........................ 104
                                                               Home screen ............................... 105
                            Static bar.....................................75
                            Center display.............................76  Map screen.................................. 105
                            Screen tab bar ............................76  Waypoint................................... 105
                            Status indicator bar.....................77  Map settings screen ................. 106]]></page><page Index="7"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 3  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Table of contents

                          Trip screen ...................................109  Driver’s side console
                          Drive control screen.....................110  compartment ......................... 130
                                                                 Stowable table
                          Media screen................................111
                                                                   (except for AR210 / SX210) ... 131
                            Radio screen (AM/FM) ..............111  Glove compartment
                            Weather screen.........................112  (AR210 / SX210) .................... 131
                            Bluetooth screen.......................112  Glove compartment
                            Auxiliary screen.........................113  (except for AR210 / SX210) ... 131
                            Zone control screen..................113  Wet storage compartment........ 132
                          System control screen .................114
                                                               Walk-through ............................... 133
                          Setting screen ..............................114
                                                                 Front walk-through ................... 133
                            Time setting screen...................114  Rear walk-through .................... 133
                            Depth alarm setting screen.......115  Windshield ................................... 133
                            Unit setting screen....................115  Folding mirror
                            Brightness setting screen .........115  (212XE / 212XD)..................... 134
                            Maintenance setting screen......116  Anchor light
                            Language setting screen...........116
                            Tuner Region setting screen .....116  (except for SX210 / 212)........... 135
                          Warnings ......................................117  Anchor light (SX210 / 212)........... 135
                            Check engine warning ..............119  Bow ladder................................... 136
                            Low oil pressure warning..........119  Swim platform.............................. 137
                            Over temperature warning ........119  Stern ladder .............................. 137
                            Low/High voltage warning ........120  Remote control keypad
                            Communication error                    (except for AR210 / SX210) ... 138
                             warning ..................................120  Side table.................................. 138
                            Low fuel level warning...............120  Wakeboard tower
                            Depth warning...........................120
                                                                 (except for SX210 / 212)........... 140
                                                                 Collapsing and setting up the
                        Equipment operation ....................121
                                                                   wakeboard tower (AR210) ..... 140
                          Seats ............................................121  Collapsing and setting up the
                            Driver’s seat (AR210 / SX210)...122    wakeboard tower
                            Driver’s seat                          (212S / 212SE / 212SD /
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) ...123     212XE / 212XD)...................... 141
                            Passenger’s seat                   Bimini top
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) ...125   (except for SX210 / 212)........... 142
                          Engine hood.................................126
                                                                 Setting up the bimini top .......... 142
                          Storage compartments ................126  Storing the bimini top ............... 144
                            Anchor storage compartment...126     Trailering with the bimini top .... 146
                            Front underseat storage              Removing the bimini top........... 146
                             compartments........................127  Installing the bimini top............. 146
                            Ski locker ..................................127  Bimini top (SX210 / 212) .............. 146
                            Rear underseat storage               Setting up the bimini top .......... 146
                             compartment (starboard) .......128  Storing the bimini top in the
                            Rear underseat storage                 upright position...................... 147
                             compartment (port) ................129  Storing the bimini top in the
                            Enclosed storage                       fully collapsed position.......... 148
                             compartment..........................129  Trailering with the bimini top .... 149
                                                                 Removing the bimini top........... 149]]></page><page Index="8"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 4  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Table of contents

                            Installing the bimini top.............149  Horn check ............................... 171
                                                                 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        Operation and handling                     check ..................................... 172
                                                                 Post-launch checks.................. 172
                        requirements .................................150
                                                                 Engine shut-off switch check ... 172
                          Fuel requirement ..........................150
                                                                 Cooling water pilot outlet
                            Fuel ...........................................150  check ..................................... 173
                          Engine oil requirement .................151  Fuel level check ........................ 173
                            Engine oil...................................151
                          Draining the bilge water ...............155  Operation....................................... 175
                            Draining the bilge water on        Driving your boat ......................... 175
                             land ........................................155  Getting to know your boat........ 175
                            Draining the bilge water on          Learning to operate your
                             water ......................................156
                                                                   boat........................................ 175
                                                                 Starting the engines.................. 175
                        First-time operation ........................159  Stopping the engines................ 179
                          Engine break-in                        Leaving a dock ......................... 180
                            (AR210 / SX210)........................159  Turning the boat ....................... 180
                                                                 Boating with passengers .......... 182
                          Engine break-in
                                                                 Stopping the boat..................... 182
                            (except for AR210 / SX210).......159
                                                                 Boarding from the water........... 183
                                                                 Boarding from the bow............. 183
                        Pre-operation checks ...................160  Boarding from a dock or
                            Pre-operation checklist.............160  landing jetty ........................... 183
                          Pre-operation check points..........162  Docking..................................... 183
                                                                 Beaching................................... 184
                            Pre-launch checks ....................162
                            Steering system checks............162  Anchoring ................................. 185
                            Remote control lever checks ....162  Crossing wakes and swells ...... 185
                            Throttle/shift paddle checks       Post-operation checks ................ 186
                             (212SD / 212XD) ....................163
                            Fire extinguisher check.............163  Trailering........................................ 188
                            Access port cap check .............165  Trailering the boat........................ 188
                            Jet intake checks ......................165  Hitch ......................................... 188
                            Fuel system checks ..................165  Trailering checklist.................... 188
                            Engine oil level check................166  Backing your trailer................... 189
                            Battery check............................167  Launching ................................. 190
                            Bilge water check......................167  Loading..................................... 190
                            Drain plug check .......................167  Lifting........................................ 191
                            Blower switch check
                             (AR210 / SX210).....................168
                            Blower checks                     Care and storage .......................... 192
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) ...168  Post-operation care..................... 192
                            Navigation and anchor lights         Flushing the cooling system..... 192
                             switch check                        Cleaning the boat ..................... 193
                             (AR210 / SX210).....................169  Basic stain guide ...................... 195
                            Navigation and anchor lights         Battery care (AR210 / SX210)... 196
                             checks                              Battery care
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) ...170     (except for AR210 / SX210) ... 197]]></page><page Index="9"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 5  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Table of contents

                          Long-term storage .......................199
                            Fuel system...............................199
                            Lubrication ................................199
                            Grease points............................199

                        Maintenance ..................................201
                          Maintenance.................................201
                            Owner’s/operator’s manual ......201
                            Removing and installing the
                             engine covers
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) ...201
                            Periodic maintenance chart ......203

                        Specifications ..................................207
                          Specifications (AR210 / SX210) ...207
                          Specifications
                            (except for AR210 / SX210).......209

                        Trouble recovery ...........................212
                          Troubleshooting ...........................212
                            Troubleshooting chart...............212
                          Emergency procedures................214
                            Jet pump clean-out
                             procedure...............................214
                            Raising the shift gates
                             (212SE / 212SD / 212XE /
                             212XD) ...................................216
                            Power steering system will not
                             operate (212SD / 212XD) .......217
                            Jump-starting............................219
                            Fuse replacement
                             (AR210 / SX210).....................220
                            Fuse replacement
                             (except for AR210 / SX210) ...221
                            Engine compartment.................224
                            Running on one engine .............225
                            Towing the boat ........................226
                        Consumer information....................227
                          Limited warranty ..........................227
                          YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                            (Y.E.S.) ......................................229
                          Sample float plan .........................230

                        Index...............................................231]]></page><page Index="10"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 1  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels

                         Identification number records
                        Record your Primary  Identification (PRI-ID)
                        number, Hull Identification Number (HIN), and
                        engine serial numbers in the spaces provided
                        to assist you in ordering spare  parts  from
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer. Also, record and
                        keep these ID numbers in a separate place in
                                                                                PRI-I.D.
                        case your boat is stolen.              MODEL
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                                                               ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A. WITH FOREIGN & DOMESTIC
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number  COMPONENTS.
                                                               ASSEMBLÉ EN U.S. AVEC DES COMPOSANTS ÉTRANGERS ET
                                                               DOMESTIQUES.
                        The PRI-ID number is stamped on a label at-
                        tached inside the engine compartment. (See
                        page 126 for engine hood opening and clos-  Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                        ing procedures.)                      The HIN is stamped into the right rear corner
                        AR210 / SX210                         of the hull.
                                            1







                                                                                          1

                                                                YAMC
                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                                                              1  Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                        Except for AR210 / SX210
                                                              Engine serial numbers
                                                              The engine serial numbers are stamped on a
                                                              label attached to each engine unit. (See page
                                           1
                                                              126  for engine  hood opening and  closing
                                                              procedures.)







                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number






                        1]]></page><page Index="11"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 2  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels

                        AR210 / SX210                         Starboard side

                                                 1


                                                                 YAMAHA



                                                                 YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                                 MADE IN JAPAN
                                                                 PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON

                        1  Engine serial number
                        Except for AR210 / SX210



                                      1










                        1  Engine serial number

                        Port side




                           YAMAHA



                            YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                            MADE IN JAPAN
                            PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON











                                                                                                2]]></page><page Index="12"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 3  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels

                          Emission control information        Except for AR210 / SX210
                        These engines conform to U.S. Environmen-             1
                        tal Protection Agency (EPA) and/or California
                        Air Resources Board (CARB) regulations for
                        marine SI engines applicable at the time of
                        manufacture.
                        The 4-star labels are affixed to models that
                        meet  the Air Resources Board’s emission
                        standards for 4-star models. (See page 5 for
                        information on the star labels.)
                        Star labels are not affixed to 3-star models.
                        These engines are certified to operate on reg-  1  Emission control information label
                        ular unleaded gasoline.
                                                              3-star models
                        Approval labels of emission control    EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                        certificate                            THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                                                               ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                                                               ADJUSTMENTS.
                        These labels are attached to each engine unit  ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                                            liters
                                                                            EPA FEL : HC+NOx               , CO                g/kW-h
                                                               MAX POWER :                                    kW
                        and to the inside of the engine compartment.  YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                        (See page 126 for engine hood opening and
                                                              4-star models
                        closing procedures and page 201 for engine
                        cover removal and installation procedures.)  EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                                                               THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                        AR210 / SX210                          FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                                                               ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                                            liters
                                                               MAX POWER :                                    kW  EPA/CA FEL : HC+NOx            , CO             g/kW-h
                                          1                    YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                                                              AR210 / SX210
                                                                                       1






                        1  Emission control information label



                                                              1  Emission control information label









                        3]]></page><page Index="13"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 4  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels

                        Except for AR210 / SX210              Manufactured date labels
                                                              (AR210 / SX210)
                                                              These labels are attached to each port sides
                                                              of the air filter case. (See page 126 for engine
                                                 1
                                                              hood opening and closing procedures.)






                                                                                            1
                        1  Emission control information label
                        3-star models

                         EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION
                         THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                         ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                         ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS.  1  Manufactured date label
                         ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:                                    liters
                         MAX POWER:                                         kW  EPA FEL: HC+NOx            ,CO            g/kW-h
                         EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                         YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                        4-star models
                         EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION  TWC/HO25/MFI/OBD/EECS
                         THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                         FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                         SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING
                         CERTIFIED COMPONENTS. MEETS        MY CALIFORNIA EVAP EMISSIONS.
                         REGULATIONS FOR SPARK-IGNITION MARINE WATERCRAFT.
                         ENGINE FAMILY:   DISPLACEMENT:                  liters
                         MAX POWER:                                   kW  EPA/CA FEL: HC+NOx             ,CO            g/kW-h
                         EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:       Manufactured date labels
                         ARB EVAP FAMILY:  ARB EVAP EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM:
                         YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                              (except for AR210 / SX210)
                                                              These labels are attached to  each engine
                                                              unit. (See page 126 for engine hood opening
                                                              and closing procedures and page 201 for en-
                                                              gine cover  removal and  installation proce-
                                                              dures.)
                                                                                        1










                                                              1  Manufactured date label



                                                                                                4]]></page><page Index="14"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 5  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels

                                                              stroke engines. These engines are equivalent
                                                              to the U.S. EPA’s 2006 standards for marine
                                                              engines.






                        Star labels (4-star models)
                        This boat is labeled with a California Air Re-
                        sources Board (CARB) star label. See below
                        for a description of your particular label.


                                  1

                                                              Two Stars - Very Low Emission
                                                              The two-star label  identifies engines  that
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2004
                                                              exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                                                              ing these standards have 20% lower emis-
                                                              sions than One Star-Low Emission engines.
                        1  Star label location


                                    1











                        1  Star label location
                                                              Three Stars - Ultra Low Emission
                                                              The three-star label identifies engines that
                        One Star - Low Emission
                        The one-star label identifies engines that  meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2008
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                                              exhaust emission standards or the Sterndrive
                        Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2001
                                                              and Inboard marine engine 2003-2008 ex-
                        exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                                                              haust emission standards. Engines meeting
                        ing these standards have 75% lower emis-
                                                              these standards have 65% lower emissions
                        sions than conventional carbureted two-
                                                              than One Star-Low Emission engines.
                        5]]></page><page Index="15"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 6  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels


















                        Four Stars - Super Ultra Low Emission
                        The four-star label identifies engines  that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s  Sterndrive
                        and Inboard  marine engine 2009 exhaust
                        emission standards. Personal Watercraft and
                        Outboard marine engines may also comply
                        with these standards. Engines meeting these
                        standards have 90% lower emissions  than
                        One Star-Low Emission engines.


































                                                                                                6]]></page><page Index="16"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 7  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels

                                                   Important labels
                        Read the following labels before operating this boat. If you need any additional information,
                        contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                          AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S
                                                       AR210/SX210
                                                                   20

                                                                               16
                                                                                   2
                                                                                       3







                            7
                                                               1

                             6                                                             5






                          212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                                                          1       16        3     2






                                                                                             5


                                                                                             4
                             7













                        7]]></page><page Index="17"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 8  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels


















                                                    8





















                                          9         11     17      10         9























                                                                                                8]]></page><page Index="18"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 9  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels






















                                          12





                                      18





                                                                                         13
                           14







                                      14


















                        9]]></page><page Index="19"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 10  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels



                           AR210                212S/212SE/212SD/212XE/212XD
                             15
                                                  15






                                            18




                                  14






                                                                         Except for
                                                                         AR210/SX210
                                                                          3-star models



                                                            14




                                                  AR210/SX210              19
                                                  3-star models           4-star models
                                                                                           19






                                                                19










                                                                                               10]]></page><page Index="20"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 11  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels

                        Warning labels
                        If any of these labels is damaged or missing, contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer for a replacement.
                           1












                           2







                                                              F3A-U415P-20

                           3                                      4
                                                                  212XE / 212XD

                                                                   Improper use of the ballast system can
                                                                   overload the boat, causing poor handling and
                                                                   increased risk of swamping.
                                                                   Ballast system adds 1303 lb (591 kg) when full.
                                                                   Include this weight when making sure your
                                                                   load does not exceed the weight shown on
                                                                   the Maximum Capacities Label.


                                                                   Drain ballast completely before trailering the
                                                                   boat to reduce the risk of a towing accident.
                                                                   The Increased weight of ballast can cause
                                                                   unsafe towing conditions due to negative
                                                                   tongue weight, including decreased tow
                                                                   vehicle stability and greater chance of a
                                                                   runaway trailer that has come off the hitch.











                        11]]></page><page Index="21"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 12  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels


                           5

























                           6  AR210/SX210
                           7  Except for AR210/SX210










                           8






















                                                                                               12]]></page><page Index="22"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 13  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels


                           9











                           10













                                                                 F3A-U415R-20
                           11














                           12
















                        13]]></page><page Index="23"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 14  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                      General and important labels


                           13







                                                          F1C-U416B-20

                           14











                           15





































                                                                                               14]]></page><page Index="24"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 15  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        General and important labels

                        Other labels

                           16
                           212XE/212XD                        Except for 212XE/212XD

                           MAXIMUM CAPACITIES                 MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
                             10    PERSONS OR 1860   LBS.       10    PERSONS OR 1860   LBS.
                                2100 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR         2200 POUNDS, PERSONS, GEAR

                           THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY  THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY
                           STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION  STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION
                           MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS  MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS
                           MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING U.S.A., INC.  MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING U.S.A., INC.
                           MODEL:                   VONORE, TN  MODEL:                 VONORE, TN
                            DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.  DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.
                            MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.  MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.
                                      R                                  R
                                       NATIONAL MARINE                    NATIONAL MARINE
                                       MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION          MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
                           17                               18






                                                            19

                                                              All applicable electrical system components installed as
                                                              original equipment meet appropriate U.S.C.G. requirements
                                                              for ignition protection. (Ref. 33 CFR 183.410 and 183.440)
                                                              YAMAHA                     60E-83627-00

                                                            20 AR210/SX210





















                        15]]></page><page Index="25"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 16  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                                  Limitations on who may
                        The safe use and operation of this boat is    operate the boat
                        dependent upon the use of proper operat-   Yamaha recommends a minimum operator
                        ing techniques, as well as upon the com-  age of 16 years old.
                        mon sense, good judgment, and expertise  Adults must supervise use by minors.
                        of the operator. Every operator should  Know the operator age and training re-
                        know the following  requirements  before  quirements for your state. A boating safety
                        operating the boat.                    course is recommended  and may be  re-
                         Before operating the boat, read the own-  quired in your state. You can find local rules
                          er’s/operator’s manual,  the Operation  In-  by contacting the United States Coast
                          struction card, and all labels on the boat.  Guard (USCG), the National Association of
                          These materials should give you an under-  State Boating Law Administrators, or your
                          standing of the boat and its operation.  local Power Squadron.
                         Never allow anyone to  operate this boat   This boat is designed to carry the operator,
                          until they too have read this owner’s/oper-  up to 9 passengers, and cargo. Never ex-
                          ator’s manual, the Operation Instruction  ceed the maximum load limit or allow more
                          card, and all labels.                than 10 persons (or 9 persons if the wake-
                                                               boarder or water-skier is being pulled) to
                                                               ride in the boat at any time. Weight distri-
                                                               bution affects performance. Keep weight in
                                                               the boat low and evenly distributed from
                                                               side-to-side  and bow-to-stern. Remove
                                                               any unnecessary cargo and store it on
                                                               shore.




























                                                                                               16]]></page><page Index="26"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 17  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                            Safety information

                                                                    Cruising limitations
                          Maximum load (212XE / 212XD):
                                                               Scan constantly for people, objects,  and
                            Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                               other  watercraft. Be alert for conditions
                            passengers:
                                                               that limit your visibility or block your vision
                              953 kg (2100 lb): ballast is empty
                                                               of others.
                              495 kg (1092 lb): ballast is full
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                            gers:
                              843 kg (1860 lb): ballast is empty
                              386 kg (852 lb): ballast is full
                          Maximum load  (except  for 212XE /
                          212XD):
                            Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                            passengers:
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                               Operate defensively at safe speeds and
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                               keep a safe distance from people, objects,
                            gers:
                                                               and other watercraft.
                              843 kg (1860 lb)
                                                               Do not follow directly behind other water-
                                                               craft.
                                                               Do not go near others to spray or splash
                                                               them with water.
                                                               Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that
                                                               make it hard for others to avoid you or un-
                                                               derstand where you are going.
                                                               Avoid areas  with submerged objects  or
                                                               shallow water.
                                                               Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                                                               member, boats do not have brakes.
                                                               Do not pull the remote control levers back
                                                               to idle when trying to steer away from ob-
                                                               jects—you need throttle to steer. Always
                                                               check throttle, shift, and steering controls
                                                               for proper operation before starting boat.
                                                               Operate within your limits and avoid ag-
                                                               gressive maneuvers to reduce the risk of
                                                               loss of control, ejection, and collision.










                        17]]></page><page Index="27"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 18  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                         This is a high-performance boat—not a toy.  Operational requirements
                          Sharp turns or jumping wakes or waves   The operator and all passengers must wear
                          can increase the risk of back/spinal injury  a U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved per-
                          (paralysis), facial injuries, and broken legs,  sonal flotation device (PFD).
                          ankles,  and other bones.  Do not jump
                          wakes or waves.                                             1
                         Do not  operate the boat  in rough water,
                          bad weather, or when visibility is poor; this
                          may lead to an accident causing injury or
                          death. Be alert to the possibility of adverse
                          weather. Take note of  weather forecasts
                          and the prevailing weather conditions be-
                          fore setting out in your boat.
                         Never operate in water that is less than
                          90 cm (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the
                                                              1  PFD
                          boat, otherwise you increase your chance
                          of hitting a submerged object, which could   Eye protection  is recommended  to keep
                          result in injury.                    wind, water, and glare from the sun out of
                                                               your eyes while you operate your boat. Re-
                                                               straining straps for eyewear are made
                                                               which are designed to  float should  your
                                                               eyewear fall in the water.
                                                               Never operate the boat after consuming al-
                                     90 cm (3 ft)
                                                               cohol or taking drugs.
                                                               For reasons of safety and proper care of
                                                               the boat, always perform the pre-operation
                                                               checks listed on page 160 before operating
                                                               the boat.
                         Leave a “float plan” with a responsible per-   Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                          son on shore. Tell where you plan to go and  ed seating area, place feet  on  the deck,
                          when you plan to arrive, and provide a de-  and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                          scription of your boat. Advise this person if  straps when the boat is in motion.
                          your plans change and also when you ar-   Always consult your doctor on whether it is
                          rive to prevent false alarms. A sample float  safe for you to ride in this boat if you are
                          plan is included on page 230.        pregnant or in poor health.
                         Follow navigation rules and state and local   Do not attempt to modify this boat.
                          laws that apply to your boat.        Modifications to your  boat  may reduce
                                                               safety and reliability, and render the boat
                                                               unsafe or illegal to use.





                                                                                               18]]></page><page Index="28"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 19  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                            Safety information

                         Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to  hard to see and you could accidentally hit
                          the PFD and keep it free from the steering  someone in the water.
                          wheel or other controls so that the engines   Avoid being hit by another boat. You
                          stop if the operator accidentally leaves the  should always take responsibility to watch
                          helm. Failure to attach the engine shut-off  for traffic; other boaters may not be watch-
                          cord (lanyard) could  result in  a  runaway  ing for you. If they do not see you, or you
                          boat if the operator is ejected.     maneuver more quickly than other boaters
                          After operation, remove the engine shut-off  expect, you risk a collision.
                          cord (lanyard) and the main switch keys to   Maintain a safe distance from other boats
                          avoid accidental starting or unauthorized  and  watercraft,  and also watch for  ski
                          use by children or others.           ropes or fishing lines. Obey the “Rules of
                        AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S             the road”, and be sure to check behind you
                                                               before making a turn. (See “Rules of the
                                      1                        road” on page 24.)


                                              2







                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD



                                                2




                                   1




                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)

                         Scan  constantly  for swimmers and stay
                          away from swimming areas. Swimmers are




                        19]]></page><page Index="29"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 20  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                              Required equipment                   Additional equipment
                        The  U.S. Coast Guard  (USCG) has  regula-   recommendations
                        tions which describe minimum standards of  The following equipment can help make your
                        safety. You must comply with these regula-  boating experience safer and more enjoy-
                        tions, which  apply to  boats like your boat  able:
                        which are less than 26 feet long.      Mooring fenders and lines.
                         Personal flotation devices (PFD):    Anchor with suitable line (a “Danforth” type
                          Type I, II, or III as required for all people on  anchor and line that is at least 6 times the
                          board (see “Operational requirements” for  depth of the water where you will drop an-
                          more information), plus at least one Type IV  chor are recommended).
                          (throwable type).                    Manual-type bilge pump.
                         Fire extinguisher:                   First-aid kit.
                          At least one 5-B (B-1) type hand-held por-   Waterproof flashlight with extra batteries.
                          table fire extinguisher.             Tool kit with assorted screwdrivers, pliers,
                         Visual distress signals:             wrenches (including metric  sizes), and
                          It is recommended that a USCG-approved  electrical tape.
                          day/night pyrotechnic device be stored on   Oar  or  paddle  (look for one with a  boat
                          your boat. A mirror can also be used as an  hook on the other end).
                          emergency signal. Contact  your  Yamaha   Spare parts, such as fuses.
                          Boat Dealer or the Coast Guard for more   Navigation charts for the waters where you
                          information.                         will be boating.
                         Sound signalling device:             Tow-rope.
                          Your boat is equipped with a horn that can
                          be used to signal other boats. See “Rules
                          of the road” for more information.
                         Navigation lights:
                          Your boat is equipped with navigation
                          lights for use between sunset and sunrise,
                          and during periods of  reduced  visibility,
                          such as fog. Be sure these lights are work-
                          ing and  are turned on  when necessary.
                          (See pages 66, 86, and 135 for more infor-
                          mation.)














                                                                                               20]]></page><page Index="30"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 21  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                            Safety information

                               Hazard information                   Boat characteristics
                        Never start the engines or let them run for any   Jet thrust turns the boat. Moving the re-
                        length of time in an enclosed area. Exhaust  mote control levers completely back to idle
                        fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless,  or the neutral position produces only mini-
                        odorless gas that may cause loss of con-  mum thrust. If you are traveling at speeds
                        sciousness and death within a short time. Al-  above trolling, you will have  rapidly de-
                        ways operate the boat in an open area.  creasing ability to steer without  throttle.
                        It is also important to have the engines off  You may still have some turning ability im-
                        when anyone is using the ladder on models  mediately after moving the remote control
                        equipped with  one because  of the carbon  levers back to idle, but once the engines
                        monoxide in the exhaust gases coming from  slow down, the boat will no longer respond
                        underneath the step.                   to steering wheel input until you apply
                                                               throttle again or you reach a trolling speed.
                                                               Practice  turning in an open area without
                                                               obstructions until you have a good feel for
                                                               the maneuver.
                                                               This  Yamaha  boat is water-jet  propelled.
                                                               The pumps are directly connected to the
                                                               engines. This means that the jet thrust will
                                                               produce some movement  whenever  the
                                                               engines are running. The boat has a “neu-
                                                               tral” position, but since the boat is always
                                                               producing thrust while the engines are run-
                                                               ning, some forward or reverse movement
                                                               may occur.
                                                               Do not use the reverse function to slow
                                                               down or stop the boat above trolling speed
                                                               as it could cause you to lose control, be
                                                               ejected, or impact the steering wheel  or
                                                               other parts of the boat. This could increase
                                                               the risk of serious injury. It could also dam-
                                                               age the shift mechanisms.
                                                               Reverse can be used to slow down or stop
                                                               during slow-speed maneuvering, such as
                                                               when docking. Once the engines are idling,
                                                               shift to reverse and gradually increase en-
                                                               gine speed. Make sure that there are no
                                                               obstacles  or  people behind you before
                                                               shifting into reverse.





                        21]]></page><page Index="31"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 22  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                         Keep away from the intake grates while the   Night operation
                          engines are on. Items such  as  long  hair,  When using your boat before dawn or after
                          loose clothing, or PFD straps can become  dusk, you must have both bow and anchor
                          entangled in moving parts, resulting in se-  lights operating. When at anchor in the dark,
                          vere injury or drowning.            the anchor light must be lit. (See pages 66,
                         Never insert any object into the jet thrust  86, 114, and 135 for instructions.)
                          nozzles while the engines are running. Se-
                          vere injury or death could result from com-
                          ing in contact with the rotating parts of the
                          jet pumps.






                                                        2


                                   1



                        1  Intake grate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle

                         Stop the engines and remove the clip from
                          the engine shut-off switch before removing
                          any debris or weeds, which may have col-
                          lected around the jet intakes. (See page
                          214 for more information.)






















                                                                                               22]]></page><page Index="32"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 23  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                            Safety information

                           Wakeboarding and water-             A second person should be on board as a
                                      skiing                   spotter to watch the wakeboarder or wa-
                                                               ter-skier; in most states, it is required by
                        You can use the boat to tow a wakeboarder
                                                               law. Let the person being pulled direct the
                        or water-skier, using the tow pylon or the ski
                                                               operator’s control of speed and direction
                        tow hook provided.
                                                               with  hand signals.  Be sure the seat is
                        It is the boat operator’s responsibility to be
                                                               locked in place (see page 121) before get-
                        alert to the safety of the wakeboarder or wa-
                                                               ting underway.
                        ter-skier and others. Know and follow all state
                                                               When preparing to pull the wakeboarder or
                        and local regulations in effect for the waters
                                                               water-skier, operate the boat at the slowest
                        in which you will be operating.
                                                               possible speed until the boat is well away
                        The following are some important consider-
                                                               from the person being pulled and slack in
                        ations for minimizing  risks while  pulling  a
                                                               the tow-rope is taken up. Make sure that
                        wakeboarder or water-skier.
                                                               the rope is not looped around anything.
                         The  wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               After checking that the wakeboarder or wa-
                          wear an approved PFD, preferably a bright-
                                                               ter-skier is ready and that there is no traffic
                          ly colored one so boat operators can see
                                                               or other obstacles, apply enough throttle to
                          the person being pulled.
                                                               raise the person.
                         The  wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               Make smooth, wide turns. The boat is ca-
                          wear protective clothing. Severe internal in-
                                                               pable of very sharp turns, which could ex-
                          juries can occur if water is forced into body
                                                               ceed the  abilities of the wakeboarder  or
                          cavities as a result of falling into the water
                                                               water-skier. Keep the person being pulled
                          or while  reboarding. Normal swimwear
                                                               at least 50 m (164 ft), about twice the dis-
                          does not adequately protect against force-
                                                               tance of a standard tow-rope, away from
                          ful water entry into the rectum or vagina.
                                                               any potential hazard.
                          The person being pulled should  wear  a
                                                               The  operators  of boats and other water-
                          wetsuit bottom or clothing  that provides
                                                               craft may not be aware that you are pulling
                          equivalent protection. Such clothing  in-
                                                               a wakeboarder or  water-skier. Together
                          cludes thick, tightly woven, sturdy, and
                                                               with the  spotter, pay attention to others
                          snug-fitting apparel  such as  denim, but
                                                               around you and cruise at safe speeds.
                          does not include spandex or similar fab-
                                                               Be alert to the hazard of the tow-rope han-
                          rics, like those used in bicycle shorts.
                                                               dle  snapping  back at the boat when  the
                                                               wakeboarder or water-skier falls or is un-
                                                               able to get up.
                                                              See pages 11 and 140 for wakeboard tower
                                                              use.
                        23]]></page><page Index="33"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 24  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                                Rules of the road             Give-way vessel
                        Your Yamaha boat is legally considered a  The vessel which does not have the right-of-
                        powerboat. Operation of the boat must be  way has the duty to take positive and timely
                        in accordance with the rules and regula-  action to stay out of the way of the stand-on
                        tions governing the waterway on which it  vessel. Normally, you should not  cross in
                        is used.                              front of the vessel with the right-of-way. You
                        Just as there are rules that apply when you  should slow down or change directions brief-
                        are driving on streets and highways, there are  ly  and pass  behind the other vessel. You
                        waterway rules that apply when you are oper-  should always move in such a way that the
                        ating your boat. These rules are used interna-  operator of the other vessel can see what you
                        tionally, and are also enforced by the United  are doing.
                        States Coast Guard and local agencies. You  The  General Prudential Rule regarding the
                        should be  aware of these  rules, and follow  right-of-way is that if a collision appears un-
                        them whenever you encounter another vessel  avoidable, neither boat has the right-of-way.
                        on the water.                         Both boats must avoid the collision.
                        Several sets  of rules prevail according to  In other words, follow the standard rules ex-
                        geographic location, but are all basically the  cept when a collision will occur unless both
                        same as the International Rules of the Road.  vessels try to avoid each other. If that is the
                        The rules presented here in this owner’s/op-  case, both vessels become give-way  ves-
                        erator’s manual are condensed, and have  sels.
                        been provided for your convenience only.  Rules when encountering vessels
                                                              There are three main situations that you may
                        Consult your local U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary
                                                              encounter  with other vessels which  could
                        or Department of Motor Vehicles for a com-
                                                              lead to a collision unless the Steering Rules
                        plete set of rules governing the waters in
                                                              are followed:
                        which you will be operating your boat.
                                                              Meeting: you are approaching another vessel
                        Steering and sailing rules
                        Whenever two vessels on the water meet one  head-on.
                        another, one vessel has the right-of-way; it is  Crossing:  you are traveling across  another
                        called the “stand-on” vessel. The vessel that  vessel’s path.
                        does not have the right-of-way is called the  Overtaking: you are passing or being passed
                        “give-way” or “burdened” vessel. These rules  by another vessel.
                        determine which vessel has the right-of-way,
                        and what each vessel should do.
                        Stand-on vessel
                        The vessel with the right-of-way has the duty
                        to continue its course and speed, except to
                        avoid an immediate  collision. When you
                        maintain your direction and speed, the other
                        vessel will be able to determine how best to
                        avoid you.




                                                                                               24]]></page><page Index="34"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 25  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                            Safety information

                        In the following illustration, your boat is in the  Crossing
                        center. You should give the right-of-way to  When two power-driven vessels are crossing
                        any vessels shown in the white area (you are  each other’s path close enough to run the risk
                        the give-way vessel). Any vessels in the shad-  of collision, the vessel which has the other on
                        ed area must yield to you (they are the give-  the starboard (right) side must keep out of the
                        way vessels). Both you and the meeting ves-  way of the other. If the other vessel is on your
                        sel must alter course to avoid each other.  starboard (right) side, you must keep out of
                                                              its way; you are the give-way vessel. If the
                                                              other vessel is on your port (left) side, remem-
                                                              ber that you should maintain course and di-
                                                              rection, provided the other vessel gives you
                                                              the right-of-way, as it should.







                        Meeting
                        If you are meeting another power-driven ves-
                        sel head-on, and are close enough to run the
                        risk of collision, neither of you has the right-
                        of-way. Both of you should alter course to
                        avoid an accident. You should keep the other  Overtaking
                        vessel on your port (left) side. This rule does  If you are passing another vessel, you are the
                        not apply if both of you will clear one another  give-way vessel. This means that the other
                        if you continue on your set course and speed.  vessel is expected to maintain its course and
                                                              speed. You must stay out of its way until you
                                                              are clear of it. Likewise, if another vessel is
                                                              passing you, you should maintain your speed
                                                              and direction so that the other vessel can
                                                              steer itself around you.

















                        25]]></page><page Index="35"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 26  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                        Other special situations              bers, and  lights to show which side of  the
                        There are three other rules you should  be  buoy a boater should pass on when navigat-
                        aware of when operating your boat around  ing in a particular direction. The markings on
                        other vessels.                        these buoys are oriented from the perspec-
                        Narrow channels and bends             tive of being entered from seaward (the boat-
                        When navigating in  narrow channels, you  er is going towards the harbor). Red buoys
                        should keep to the right when it is safe and  are passed on  your starboard (right) side
                        practical to do so. If the operator of a power-  when proceeding from open water into port,
                        driven vessel  is preparing to go around a  and black buoys are to your port (left) side. An
                        bend that may obstruct the view of other wa-  easy way to remember the meaning of the
                        ter vessels, the operator should sound a pro-  colors is the phrase “red right returning.”
                        longed blast of  four  to six  seconds on  the  When navigating out of the harbor, your posi-
                        horn. If another vessel is around the bend, it  tion with respect to the buoys should be re-
                        too should sound the horn. Even if no reply is  versed; red buoys should be  to  port and
                        heard, however, the vessel should still pro-  black buoys to starboard.
                        ceed around the bend with caution.    Many bodies of water used by boaters are
                        Fishing vessel right-of-way           entirely within the boundaries of a particular
                        All vessels fishing with nets, lines, or trawls  state. The Uniform State Waterway Marking
                        are considered to be “fishing vessels” under  System has been devised for these waters.
                        the International Rules. Vessels with trolling
                        lines are not considered fishing vessels. Fish-
                        ing vessels have the right-of-way regardless
                        of position. Fishing vessels cannot, however,
                        impede the passage of other vessels in nar-
                        row channels.
                        Sailing vessel right-of-way
                        Sailing vessels should normally be given the
                        right-of-way. The exceptions to this are:
                        (1) When the sailing vessel is overtaking the
                            power-driven vessel, the power-driven
                            vessel has the right-of-way.
                        (2) Sailing vessels should keep clear of any
                            fishing vessel.
                        (3) In a narrow channel, a sailing vessel
                            should not hamper the safe passage of a
                            power-driven vessel that  can  navigate
                            only in such a channel.
                        Reading buoys and other markers
                        The waters of the United States are marked
                        for safe navigation by the lateral system of
                        buoyage. Simply put, buoys and markers
                        have an arrangement of shapes, colors, num-


                                                                                               26]]></page><page Index="36"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 27  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                            Safety information

                        This system uses buoys and signs with distinctive shapes and colors to show regulatory or
                        advisory information. These markers are white with black letters and orange borders. They
                        signify speed zones, restricted areas, danger areas, and general information.





















































                        Remember, markings may vary by geographic location. Always consult local boating author-
                        ities before riding your boat in unfamiliar waters.




                        27]]></page><page Index="37"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 28  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                     Safety information

                           To get more boating safety           Enjoy your boat responsibly
                                   information                You share the areas you enjoy when operat-
                        Be informed about boating safety. Additional  ing your boat with others and with nature. So
                        publications and information can be obtained  your enjoyment includes a responsibility  to
                        from many organizations,  including the fol-  treat these other people, and the lands, wa-
                        lowing.                               ters, and wildlife with respect and courtesy.
                        United States Coast Guard             Whenever and wherever you are boating,
                        Consumer Affairs Staff (G-BC)         think of yourself as the guest of those around
                        Office of Boating, Public, and Consumer Af-  you. Remember, for example, that the sound
                        fairs                                 of your boat may be music to you, but it could
                        US Coast Guard Headquarters           be just noise to others. And the exciting
                        Washington, D.C. 20593-0001           splash of your wake can make waves others
                        http://www.uscgboating.org            won’t enjoy. Avoid riding close to shoreline
                        Other sources                         homes and waterfowl nesting areas or other
                        You can find local rules by contacting the Na-  wildlife areas, and keep a respectful distance
                        tional Association of State Boating Law Ad-  from fishermen, other boats, swimmers, and
                        ministrators, or your local Power Squadron.  populated beaches. When travel in areas like
                        Boat Education and Training           these  is unavoidable, operate slowly and
                        The Online Boating Safety Course, available  obey all laws.
                        through the watercraft section of  the  Remember that pollution can be harmful to
                        yamaha-motor.com  website, is a free, 50-  the environment. Do not refuel or add oil
                        question learning course available to the  where a spill could cause damage to nature.
                        public. Upon successful completion of 80  Keep your surroundings pleasant for the peo-
                        percent or better, the user can request a cer-  ple  and wildlife that share the  waterways:
                        tificate of completion by mail or can down-  don’t litter!
                        load one immediately. The  Online  Boating  When you go boating responsibly, with  re-
                        Safety Course, provided by  the Boat/US  spect and courtesy for others, you help en-
                        Foundation, is approved by the National As-  sure  that our waterways stay open  for  the
                        sociation of State Boating Law Administra-  enjoyment of a variety of recreational oppor-
                        tors (NASBLA) and recognized by the United  tunities.
                        States Coast Guard. This course meets the
                        education requirement for those states that
                        recognize  non-proctored,  NASBLA-ap-
                        proved courses.
                          The Online Boating Safety Course:
                          http://www.boatus.org/









                                                                                               28]]></page><page Index="38"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 29  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Description

                                                     Boat glossary



                          TERM          DEFINITION
                          Bow           The front part of the boat.
                          Deck          The “floor” or upper structure which covers the hull.
                          Give-way      The vessel that must yield the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Gunwale       The meeting junction of the deck and hull; the upper edge around the
                                        boat. Pronounced “gunnel.”
                          Hatch         An opening in the deck that provides access below.
                          Helm          The steering console.
                          Hull          The basic part of the boat; the underside.
                          Lanyard       The cord or tether that connects the operator to the engine shut-off
                                        switch so the engines will stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                        helm.
                          PFD           A personal flotation device, also known as “life jacket.”
                          Planing       Traveling at a speed fast enough so the boat has leveled out and is
                                        skimming on top of the water. There is a wake.
                          Port          The left side of the boat.
                          Stand-on      The vessel with the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Starboard     The right side of the boat.
                          Stern         The back part of the boat.
                          Sub-planing   Traveling at a medium speed. The bow of the boat is out of the water,
                                        but you are still traveling through the water. There is a wake.
                          Transom       The vertical part of the stern.
                          Trolling      Traveling at idle speed, using little or no throttle. The boat is down in the
                                        water and it is not leaving a wake.
                          Wake          The visible track of disturbed water that the boat leaves behind as it
                                        moves in the water.














                        29]]></page><page Index="39"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 30  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                Description

                                            Location of main components
                        Exterior components


                                              7
                                        6
                                                                                          8
                                    5

                              4
                                                                                           9
                           3

                           2
                                                                           8
                           1
                                                      4
                                                8            SX210/212
                                                                                       16
                          Except for SX210/212                    15

                           10                           11
                                                        12
                                                       14







                            13
                        1  Bow ladder (page 136)              12 Tow pylon
                        2  Bow light (page 66, 86)            13 Wakeboard tower (page 140)
                        3  Anchor storage compartment (page 126)  14 Wakeboard tower rack (212XE/212XD)
                        4  Handrail                           15 Bimini top (page 146)
                        5  Driver’s side console compartment (page 130)  16 Anchor light (page 66, 135)
                        6  Windshield (page 133)
                        7  Folding mirror (212XE/212XD) (page 134)
                        8  Cleat
                        9  Fuel tank filler cap (page 150)
                        10 Bimini top (page 142)
                        11 Anchor light (page 86, 135)
                                                                                               30]]></page><page Index="40"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 31  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Description







                          AR210/SX210

                                       5
                                                                  6

                                                  4
                                               13
                                             3


                                     2                                                       7



                              1

                                                                                    7



                                                                          8
                             12
                                                                    9
                                                              10
                                         11              7





                        1  Rear platform hatch (page 132)     13 USB charger
                        2  Battery (page 167, 196, 197)
                        3  Glove compartment (page 131)
                        4  Stowable table (page 131)
                        5  Glove compartment (page 131)
                        6  Enclosed storage compartment (page 129)
                        7  Cleat
                        8  Anchor light socket (SX210/212) (page 135)
                        9  Cooling water pilot outlet (page 173)
                        10 Bilge pump outlet (page 156)
                        11 Reboarding grip
                        12 Ski tow hook


                        31]]></page><page Index="41"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 32  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                Description



                                                          2
                                                     4                                 1
                                             3    1
                                           4
                                        1
                                   3
                                 2


                                                                             AR210/SX210
                           1


                                                                                         1

                                                                      1
                                                                 2
                                                             3
                                                         1
                                                    5



                                         4
                                     1
                                2


                                                                                        1






                        1  Beverage holder
                        2  Speaker
                        3  Handgrip
                        4  Courtesy light (except for AR210/SX210)
                           (page 86)
                        5  Courtesy light (page 66, 86)










                                                                                               32]]></page><page Index="42"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 33  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Description

                        Seats




                           2                               3



                           1                               4





                                                              AR210/SX210



                          10                               5 11                              6







                           9                               7



                                                           8








                        1  Front port seat (rear) (page 121)  11 Passenger’s seat (AR210/SX210) (page 122)
                        2  Front port seat (front) (page 121)
                        3  Front starboard seat (front) (page 121)
                        4  Front starboard seat (rear) (page 121)
                        5  Driver’s seat (except for AR210/SX210) (page
                           123)
                        6  Driver’s seat (AR210/SX210) (page 122)
                        7  Rear starboard seat (page 122)
                        8  Rear center seat (page 122)
                        9  Rear port seat (page 122)
                        10 Passenger’s seat (except for AR210/SX210)
                           (page 125)


                        33]]></page><page Index="43"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 34  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                Description

                        Stern components









                                             9                             9
                                                                  1





                            2                                                               2
                                     3                                             3
                                         4                                    4
                                                       5

                                                                            8




                                            6                               6


                                                             7



                        1  Stern ladder (page 137)
                        2  Stern eye
                        3  Shift gate (page 45)
                        4  Jet thrust nozzle
                        5  Articulating keel (page 47)
                        6  Intake grate
                        7  Hull drain plug (page 155)
                        8  Water temperature/water depth sensor
                        9  Flush hose connector (page 192)










                                                                                               34]]></page><page Index="44"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 35  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Description

                        Helm components
                        AR210/SX210

                             18     7                1           2             3     HORN

                                                                               4     BILGE
                                                                                              7
                             BLOWER
                                                                               5     NAVI ANC
                                                                               6    LIGHTS
                                                                                    CTSY
                                                                                              8
                                17




                                                                                   10
                                                                          9

                                                         15
                                                             14   13



                                                                                           11
                                                            12V   AUDIO
                                                                  AUX-USB
                                                                                            12
                                           16



                        1  Tachometer (page 51)               16 Tilt lever (page 48)
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 52)  17 Main switch (page 43)
                        3  Horn switch (page 67)              18 Blower switch (page 67)
                        4  Bilge pump switch (page 67)
                        5  Navigation and anchor lights switch (page 66)
                        6  Courtesy light switch (page 66)
                        7  Switch circuit breaker (page 67)
                        8  Audio control keypad (page 51)
                        9  No-wake mode/cruise assist switch (page 64)
                        10 Remote control lever (page 44)
                        11 Engine shut-off switch (page 41)
                        12 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 41)
                        13 Aux input (page 51)
                        14 12 V DC outlet (page 51)
                        15 Steering wheel (page 47)

                        35]]></page><page Index="45"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 36  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                Description

                        212 / 212S


                                13                     1           2


                                HORN
                                                                                3

                                                                                  4
                                12
                                                                              5



                                                             10



                                                                                           6
                                                             9     8
                                                                                            7


                                                            12V   AUDIO
                                                                  AUX-USB
                                           11




                        1  Phone holder
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 70)
                        3  Controller (page 70)
                        4  Bilge pump indicator light (page 69)
                        5  Remote control lever (page 44)
                        6  Engine shut-off switch (page 41)
                        7  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 41)
                        8  Aux input (page 83)
                        9  12 V DC outlet (page 83)
                        10 Steering wheel (page 47)
                        11 Tilt lever (page 48)
                        12 Main switch (page 43)
                        13 Horn switch (page 69)






                                                                                               36]]></page><page Index="46"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 37  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Description

                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD





                                                          1          3                 4
                                                                           5





                                        2
                                                       11
                                                       11










                           12         13

                                                                  10                     6
                              12V
                                                                                         7

                               BILGE
                                    HORN
                          15           14                                  9             8




                        1  Phone holder                       12 12 V DC outlet (page 96)
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 101)  13 Aux input jack (page 113)
                        3  Controller (page 98)               14 “HORN” switch (page 96)
                        4  Remote control lever (page 44)     15 “BILGE” switch (page 96)
                        5  Steering wheel (page 47)
                        6  Main switch (page 44)
                        7  Engine shut-off switch (page 41)
                        8  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 41)
                        9  Tilt lever (page 48)
                        10 “START/STOP” button (page 44)
                        11 Throttle/shift paddle (page 47)


                        37]]></page><page Index="47"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 38  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                Description

                        Engine components
                        3-star models (AR210/SX210)


                                      1
                                                                         2







                                   3

                                                                                    3


                                   4
                                                                                    4













                                                      5



                        1  Blower (page 168)
                        2  Oil tank filler cap/Dipstick (page 152)
                        3  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        4  Air filter case
                        5  Fuse box (cover) (page 220)













                                                                                               38]]></page><page Index="48"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 39  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Description

                        3-star models (212 / 212S / 212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD)



                                   1









                                                             2

                                                              3


                                                             4



                                                            5





                                                           6
                                           7




                        1  Blower (page 168)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 221)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 153)
                        4  Engine cover (page 201)
                        5  Dipstick (page 153)
                        6  Air filter case
                        7  Spark plug/Ignition coil












                        39]]></page><page Index="49"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 40  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                Description

                        4-star models (212 / 212S / 212SE / 212XE)



                                      1








                                                               2


                                                             3

                                                     5
                                                             4










                                                         6

                                         7



                        1  Blower (page 168)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 221)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 153)
                        4  Engine cover (page 201)
                        5  Dipstick (page 153)
                        6  Air filter case
                        7  Spark plug/Ignition coil












                                                                                               40]]></page><page Index="50"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 41  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Control function operation

                             Boat control functions           AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S
                        Engine shut-off switch
                             WARNING
                         Always attach the engine shut-off cord                        2     3
                          (lanyard) to your PFD before starting the
                          engines. Failure to attach the cord could               1
                          result in a runaway boat if the operator is
                          ejected.
                         Do not attach the cord to clothing that
                          could tear loose. Do not route the cord
                          in such a way that it could become en-  1  Engine shut-off switch
                          tangled, preventing it from functioning.   2  Clip
                         Avoid accidentally pulling the cord dur-  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          ing normal operation. Once the engines
                                                              212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                          have stopped, you have no steering con-
                          trol of the boat which could result in an
                          accident. Also, without  engine power,
                          the boat could slow rapidly from planing                       1
                          speed. This could cause people and ob-
                          jects in the boat to be thrown forward,
                          which could cause injury.                                      2
                        The clip  on the  end of  the engine  shut-off
                        cord (lanyard) must be attached to the engine                    3
                        shut-off switch  for the  engines to run. The
                        cord must be attached to a secure place on  1  Engine shut-off switch
                        the operator’s PFD. Should the operator fall  2  Clip
                        overboard or leave the helm, the cord will pull  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        out the clip, stopping the ignition to the both
                        engines. This will prevent the boat from run-
                        ning away under power.

















                        41]]></page><page Index="51"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 42  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Battery switch (AR210 / SX210)        Battery switches (except for AR210 /
                        The battery switch is located in the rear un-  SX210)
                        derseat storage compartment (port).   The batteries and switch assembly are locat-
                                                              ed in the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              ment (port).
                                            1
                                                              This boat uses two marine batteries. One bat-
                                                              tery is designated as the start battery. The
                                                              start battery is connected to the starter cir-
                                                              cuits on both engines to provide current for
                                                              the starter motors.
                                                              The other battery is designated as the house
                                                              battery. The house battery provides power
                                                              for the various accessory circuits on the boat,
                                                              such as the circuits for lighting, bilge pump,
                        1  Battery switch
                                                              blowers and audio system.
                        Turn the battery switch to the OFF position
                        when  the boat  will  not be used again  right
                        away. Turning the switch to the OFF position           2      3
                        will prevent the battery from being drained if  1
                        another electrical switch is accidentally left in
                        the on position.  NOTICE: Do not turn the
                        battery switch to the OFF position if the
                        boat is moored in the water as it will pre-
                        vent the anchor light from functioning.

                                 1           2                1  Battery switch assembly
                                                              2  Start battery
                                                              3  House battery

                                                              There are three switches on the battery
                                                              switch assembly: the  “START” switch,
                                                              “HOUSE” switch, and “EMERG PARALLEL”
                                                              switch.


                        1  ON position (green)
                        2  OFF position (red)










                                                                                               42]]></page><page Index="52"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 43  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Control function operation

                                                              turn the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the
                                                              OFF position.

                          1                            2      Main switches (AR210 / SX210 / 212 /
                                                              212S)
                                                              There is a main switch for each engine.
                                                              The main  switch controls the  ignition  and
                                                              electrical circuits as follows:
                                                       3
                                                              AR210 / SX210

                        1  “HOUSE” switch (red)
                        2  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch (yellow)              BLOWER
                        3  “START” switch (red)                       OFF    START
                                                                          ON            2

                                 1           2
                                                                        1


                                                              1  Main switch (port engine)
                                                              2  Main switch (starboard engine)

                                                              212 / 212S


                        1  ON position (green)
                        2  OFF position (red)                                BLOWER
                                                                      OFF    START
                                                                          ON            2
                        In normal operation, keep the “START” and
                        “HOUSE” switches in the ON position. Keep
                        the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch in the OFF
                        position. This setting allows both batteries to
                                                                        1
                        be charged automatically while the engines
                        are running.  NOTICE: Do  not turn the
                                                              1  Main switch (port engine)
                        “HOUSE” switch to the OFF position if the
                                                              2  Main switch (starboard engine)
                        boat is moored in the water as it will pre-
                        vent the anchor light from functioning.
                                                              OFF:
                        If the start battery is discharged, turn the
                                                              Ignition  circuit is switched off. The engine
                        “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the ON posi-
                                                              cannot be started, but other switches will op-
                        tion to start the engines. Once the engines
                                                              erate. (The main switch key can be removed.)
                        are started or the start battery is charged,


                        43]]></page><page Index="53"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 44  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                         Control function operation

                        ON:                                   “START/STOP” buttons (212SE /
                        Ignition circuit is switched on. (The main  212SD / 212XE / 212XD)
                        switch key cannot be removed.)        The engines can  be  started or stopped by
                        START:                                pushing the “START/STOP” buttons. It is
                        The starter motor will turn to start the engine.  possible to start or stop the engines individu-
                        (When the main switch key is released, it re-  ally.
                        turns automatically to “ON”.)          PORT: Port engine
                        TIP:                                   STBD: Starboard engine
                         The engine will not start when the clip is re-
                          moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                          The starter motor will turn over without the
                          cord attached.
                         The main switch will not operate (the starter
                          motor will not turn over) if the battery
                          switch in the rear underseat storage com-
                          partment (port) is turned to the OFF posi-
                          tion. (See page 42 for more information.)
                                                                               1
                        Main switch (212SE / 212SD / 212XE /   1  “START/STOP” button
                        212XD)
                        The main switch controls the ignition circuit  TIP:
                        as follows:                            The engine will not start when the clip is re-
                                                               moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                                        ON
                                 OFF                           The main switch will not operate (the starter
                                                               motor will not turn over) if the “START”
                                                               switch in the rear underseat storage com-
                                                               partment (port) is turned to the OFF posi-
                                                    1          tion. (See page 42 for more information.)
                                                              Remote control levers
                                                                  WARNING
                                                               Before shifting, make sure there are no
                        1  Main switch
                                                               swimmers or obstacles in the water
                        OFF:                                   near you.
                        Ignition circuit is switched off. The engines   When operating in reverse, go slowly.
                        cannot be started. (The main switch key can  Do not open the throttle more than half.
                        be removed.)                           Otherwise, the boat may become unsta-
                        ON:                                    ble, which could result in loss of control
                        Ignition circuit is switched on. (The main  and an accident.
                        switch key cannot be removed.)


                                                                                               44]]></page><page Index="54"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 45  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Control function operation

                         Do not shift into reverse while traveling
                          at planing speeds. Loss of control, boat  F  2      N          R
                                                                               1
                          swamping, or damage to the boat could      3     5        5   4
                          occur.
                                                                  7                         7
                        The remote control lever for each engine con-       6     6
                        trols both throttle and shifting. In normal op-  8                    8
                        eration, the levers are moved together.
                        Moving the  remote control levers  forward
                        from the neutral position shifts into the for-
                        ward position, and then as  the  levers  are
                                                              1  Neutral position
                        moved farther,  accelerates the engines for
                                                              2  TDE position
                        more thrust. Moving the levers back from the
                                                              3  Forward position
                        neutral position shifts into the reverse posi-
                                                              4  Reverse position
                        tion, and then as the levers are moved farther,  5  Shift
                        accelerates the engines for more thrust.  6  Fully closed
                        AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S: For cruising, ad-  7  Throttle
                        just the remote control levers so both engines  8  Fully open
                        are running at the same engine speed.
                        TIP:                                  TIP:
                        Because of the mechanical throttle linkage,  This boat is equipped with a “start-in-gear”
                        the remote control levers may not be exactly  protection. The engines will not start unless
                        even with one another when the engines are  the levers are in the neutral position.
                        running at the same engine speed.
                                                              This boat uses a direct-drive propulsion sys-
                                                              tem. Therefore, jet thrust is always being pro-
                                                              duced while the engines  are  running. The
                                                              direction of the boat is controlled by the shift
                                                              gates, which direct the flow of the jet thrust as
                                                              follows:

                                                              Neutral
                                                              The shift gates are dropped down part way
                                                              over the jet thrust nozzles. The neutral posi-
                                                              tion balances forward and reverse thrust to
                                                              help  keep the boat  from moving, although
                                                              some movement may occur.










                        45]]></page><page Index="55"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 46  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                         Control function operation



                                      1                 1                  1                 1







                                                                   2
                              2                    2                                     2

                        1  Shift gate                         1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle                  2  Jet thrust nozzle

                        Forward                               When the remote control levers are moved
                        When the remote control levers are initially  farther forward, the shift gates are lifted all the
                        moved to the forward position and the boat is  way up.  All  jet thrust is  to the rear, which
                        operating at a slow speed, the shift gates are  moves the boat forward.
                        lifted up slightly from the neutral position and
                        jet thrust is directed downward at an angle.       1                 1
                        This function, which is called the thrust direc-
                        tional enhancer (TDE), helps to provide good
                        handling response when the steering wheel is
                        turned, even though there is less thrust avail-
                        able at low engine speeds.
                                         N
                               F                   R               2                     2
                                  1
                                                              1  Shift gate
                                                              2  Jet thrust nozzle







                        1  TDE position











                                                                                               46]]></page><page Index="56"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 47  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Control function operation

                        Reverse                                will start moving in reverse at a slow speed.
                        The shift gates are dropped all the way down  When the  operator releases the throt-
                        over the jet thrust nozzles. Jet thrust is redi-  tle/shift paddle (left), the shift gates will re-
                        rected toward the bow  of the boat, which  turn to the neutral position and the engines
                        moves the boat backward.               will return to idle speed.


                                                                 1


                                                               2




                             1                      1

                        1  Shift gate                         1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                                                              2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                        Throttle/shift paddles (212SD / 212XD)
                        When the DRiVE mode is activated, the throt-  TIP:
                        tle/shift paddles can be used at low speeds   If the operator pulls both throttle/shift pad-
                        to control the throttle and shifting instead of  dles until they stop, the reverse operation
                        the remote control levers. When making  has priority.
                        small throttle  adjustments for  docking, the   When the DRiVE mode is activated, the en-
                        operator can use the throttle/shift paddles to  gine speed for forward operation is limited
                        operate the boat smoothly forward and in re-  to approximately 3000 rpm and the engine
                        verse while keeping both hands on the steer-  speed for reverse operation is limited to ap-
                        ing wheel. (See page 104 for information on  proximately 3500 rpm.
                        the DRiVE mode.)                       If either throttle/shift paddle is pulled while
                         When the operator  pulls  the throttle/shift  starting the  engines, the  engines will not
                          paddle (right), the shift gates for both en-  start.
                          gines will move to the TDE position, the en-
                          gine speed will increase, and the boat will  Steering
                          move forward at a slow speed. When the  Your boat can be steered by turning  the
                          operator releases the throttle/shift paddle  steering wheel the same direction you wish to
                          (right), the shift gates will return to the neu-  travel, to the right or left. When the steering
                          tral position and the engines will return to  wheel is turned, the angle  of  the jet thrust
                          idle speed.                         nozzles at the rear of the craft is changed,
                         When the operator  pulls  the throttle/shift  and the change in direction of the jet thrust
                          paddle  (left), the shift  gates for  both en-  nozzles changes the direction of the boat ac-
                          gines will move to the reverse position, the  cordingly.
                          engine speed will increase, and the boat



                        47]]></page><page Index="57"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 48  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                         Control function operation

                        In addition,  the direction of the  articulating
                        keel changes according to the movement of
                        the jet thrust nozzles.






                                                                  1                        1
                                                                                  2
                            1
                                                              1  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              2  Articulating keel

                                                              Since the strength of the jet thrust determines
                        1  Steering wheel
                                                              the speed and direction of a turn, the throttle
                        212SD / 212XD: When the operator is using  must always be opened above idle when at-
                        the throttle/shift paddles (DRiVE mode), the  tempting a turn, except at trolling speed.
                        turning range of the steering wheel is approx-  Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                        imately half the range of when the operator is  of the boat swings out in the opposite direc-
                        using the remote control  levers  (running  tion of your turn. If you turn to starboard, for
                        mode or single  lever mode). Although  the  example, the stern of the boat will swing to
                        turning range of the steering wheel changes  the left. Keep this in mind when navigating
                        depending on the operation mode, the move-  near a person in the water, such as a down
                        ment of the jet thrust nozzles is adjusted au-  wakeboarder or water-skier, or an obstacle,
                        tomatically so that the full range of motion for  such as a dock.
                        the nozzles matches  the turning range re-
                        gardless  of  the selected mode. (See  page  Tilt lever
                        104 for information on each operation mode.)  WARNING

                                                               Never touch the tilt lever during opera-
                                          1                    tion, otherwise the steering wheel could
                                 1      2                      suddenly change  position, which may
                                     2                         lead to an accident.
                                                               Be sure the steering wheel is locked in
                                                               position after adjustment. If the steering
                                                               wheel is not locked in position, it may
                                                               suddenly change position during opera-
                                                               tion, which may lead to an accident.
                        1  Running mode and single lever mode  The tilt lever is located under the steering
                        2  DRiVE mode (212SD / 212XD)         wheel and is used to adjust the tilt of the
                                                              steering wheel. There are 5 positions.


                                                                                               48]]></page><page Index="58"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 49  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Control function operation













                                          1


                        1  Tilt lever

                        To adjust the tilt:
                        (1) Push the lever down, and then move the
                            steering wheel up or down to the desired
                            position.
                        (2) The lever will lock into place when the
                            steering wheel is moved into one of the 5
                            available positions.
                        (3) Make sure that the tilt lever returns to its
                            original  position and that  the steering
                            wheel is securely locked in place.































                        49]]></page><page Index="59"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 50  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Helm controls (AR210 / SX210)




                             12     7                1           2             3     HORN

                                                                               4     BILGE
                                                                                              7
                             BLOWER
                                                                               5     NAVI ANC
                                                                               6    LIGHTS
                                                                                    CTSY
                                                                                              8






                                                                          9
                                                                     11    10



                                                                     12V   AUDIO
                                                                           AUX-USB




                        1  Tachometer
                        2  Multi-function display unit
                        3  Horn switch
                        4  Bilge pump switch
                        5  Navigation and anchor lights switch
                        6  Courtesy light switch
                        7  Switch circuit breaker
                        8  Audio control keypad
                        9  No-wake mode/cruise assist switch
                        10 Aux input
                        11 12 V DC outlet
                        12 Blower switch










                                                                                               50]]></page><page Index="60"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 51  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Tachometers
                        The boat is equipped with two tachometers.
                        The tachometer on the left is for the port en-
                        gine. The one on the right is for the starboard
                        engine.                                   1     2

                        The  analog tachometers  show the engine
                        speed. The numbers on the meters show the  12V  AUDIO
                                                                       AUX-USB
                        engine speed × 1000 rpm (r/min).
                                   1    2
                                                              1  12V DC outlet
                                                              2  Aux input

                                                              Audio control keypad
                                                              The audio  control  keypad is located  under
                                                              the multi-function meter.
                                                              For operating instructions, refer to the stereo
                                                              system owner’s manual included with your
                                                              boat.
                        1  Port tachometer
                        2  Starboard tachometer
                        TIP:
                        The tachometer  starts  operating when the  1
                        engine is started. At the same time, the buzz-
                        er will sound.

                        Accessory outlet
                        There is a 12V DC outlet located on the star-
                        board side of the steering wheel.     1  Audio control keypad
                         NOTICE
                                                              TIP:
                        Do not use an automotive cigarette lighter
                                                              The audio control keypad does not turn off
                        or other accessories that get hot because
                                                              even if you turn the main switch keys to the
                        the outlet can be damaged.
                                                              off position. To turn off the audio control key-
                                                              pad, push the power button on the keypad.









                        51]]></page><page Index="61"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 52  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Multi-function display unit operation
                        Because the multi-function display unit is
                        equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        the display directly to operate  the display
                        functions.

                        Touching the multi-function display






















































                                                                                               52]]></page><page Index="62"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 53  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                                    1                       2                       1

                                       1
                                       10:27 am
                                        0
                                           am
                                          7
                                         :2
                                   FUEL
                                   FUEL
                                                                                    pth
                                   FUEL L                                          Depth
                                                                                   Depth
                                                                                   D Depth
                                                        0        MPH
                                  10000 %                                          9 9 9 ft
                                  100
                                     %
                                                                                   9ft
                                                                                     ft
                                  100%
                                     %
                                                                                     ft
                                                                      H
                                                        0 MP
                                                                                Water Tempp
                                                       0 .3 Avg MP G            Water Tem
                                                       0.3 Avg MPG
                                                                               7 9 . 3 °F
                                                                               79.3°F
                                  12.3VV
                                  12.3
                                                            4            3
                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Warning bar
                        Static bar
                                                10:27  am
                                     1     FUEL                           Depth    2
                                           100%                            9ft



                                     4                                             3
                                                                       Water Temp
                                                                       79.3°F
                                           12.3V


                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, yellow, and red.
                          2  Depth level         Shows the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the water
                                                 depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, orange, and
                                                 red.


                        53]]></page><page Index="63"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 54  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                                    Name                             Function
                          3  Water temperature   Displays the ambient water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or
                                                 degrees Celsius.
                          4  Battery voltage bar graph  Shows the battery voltage in a bar graph format and numerical for-
                                                 mat.

                        Screen tab bar

                                         1        2         3         4       5

                                       10:27  am
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 57.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 56.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 56.)
                          4  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 57.)
                          5  Mute                Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.


                        Center display
                                                       1

                                                         0      MPH





                                                        0.3 Avg MPG



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen.















                                                                                               54]]></page><page Index="64"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 55  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Warning bar

                                                            1




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Warning bar         Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.



















































                        55]]></page><page Index="65"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 56  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Trip screen
                                                              This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                                         1         2 3        eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                                                              tion.
                                       0     MPH                               1          2 3



                                   No Wake Mode
                                                                        Water :  79.3 °F
                                     0.3 Avg MPG                     Economy :  23.0 Avg MPG
                                                                         Trip :  262.8 Miles
                                                                        Used :  89.9 Gal
                                Name           Function
                         1  Boat speed    Displays the boat                           Reset
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per   1  Menu
                                          hour.
                                                              2  Scrollbar
                         2  Cruise assist/  Displays whether the   3  “Reset” button
                            no-wake mode   cruise assist or no-
                            status indicator  wake mode is activat-
                                          ed.                 The menu displays 4 items at one time. Scroll
                                          When the cruise assist   through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                          is activated, “Cruise”
                                          and the cruise assist   Name             Function
                                          setting level will be dis-  Water tempera-  Displays the ambient water
                                          played.             ture*          temperature in degrees
                                          When the no-wake                   Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                          mode is activated, “No             sius.
                                          Wake Mode” will be   Average fuel con-  Displays the average dis-
                                          displayed.
                                                              sumption       tance that was traveled on
                         3  Data bar      Displays trip screen in-           1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of fuel
                                          formation. See “Trip               since the item was last re-
                                          screen” for more infor-            set. When gallons are se-
                                          mation.                            lected for the display units,
                                                                             the value is displayed in
                                                                             miles and when liters are
                                                                             selected for the display
                                                                             units, the value is dis-
                                                                             played in kilometers.
                                                              Trip distance  Displays the distance trav-
                                                                             eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                             kilometers since the item
                                                                             was last reset.
                                                              Fuel used      Displays the total fuel that
                                                                             has been consumed by the
                                                                             port and starboard engines
                                                                             in gallons or liters since the
                                                                             item was last reset.



                                                                                               56]]></page><page Index="66"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 57  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation


                             Name             Function                 Setting screen
                         Fuel flow*    Displays the total fuel con-  The setting screen can be used to change the
                                       sumption of the port and   settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                       starboard engines in gal-
                                       lons per hour or liters per
                                       hour.
                         Highest speed  Displays the highest speed      Time        Depth
                                       of the boat in miles per
                                       hour or kilometers per hour
                                       since the item was last re-      Unit      Brightness
                                       set.
                         Average speed  Displays the average boat     Wellness     Language
                                       speed in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour since             Menu     Reset
                                       the item was last reset.
                         Engine hours*  Displays the total number
                                       of hours that the engines
                                       have been running since     Item            Function
                                       the boat was new.                     Displays the time setting
                                                                   Time      screen.
                        * This item cannot be reset.
                                                                             Displays the depth alarm
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:
                                                                   Depth     setting screen.
                        Touch and hold the item that you want to re-
                        set for several seconds.                             Displays the unit setting
                                                                    Unit     screen.
                        To reset all of the display items:
                        Touch the “Reset” button to reset all of the         Displays the brightness
                                                                  Brightness  setting screen.
                        items.
                                                                             Displays the maintenance
                                                                  Wellness   setting screen.

                                                                             Displays the language set-
                                                                  Language   ting screen.

                                                                             Displays the factory reset
                                                                   Reset     screen.



                                                              Time setting screen
                                                              Tap the time unit that you want to set and
                                                              scroll up or down.







                        57]]></page><page Index="67"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 58  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                                                                   Item            Function
                                                                             Displays the current night
                                      Set Time                     NIGHT     mode setting.
                                 8     9 9     am
                                                                             Displays the current day
                                 9     0 0     pm                   DAY      mode setting.

                                10     1 1     am                            Saves the set brightness
                                Save             Back              Save      as the brightness level set-
                                                                             ting and displays the set-
                                                                             ting screen.
                                                                             Displays the setting screen
                              Item            Function             Back      without saving the set
                                       Saves the set time as the             brightness level.
                              Save     current time and displays
                                       the setting screen.
                                       Displays the setting screen   To adjust the brightness:
                              Back     without saving the set   To make the display darker, drag the slider to
                                       time.
                                                              the left. To make the display brighter, drag
                                                              the slider to the right.
                        TIP:
                        When “US Unit” is selected, the time is dis-                    1
                        played in the 12-hour format. When “Metric
                        Unit” is selected, the time is displayed in the
                        24-hour format.
                                                              1  Slider control
                        Brightness setting screen
                        The multi-function  display has a day mode  TIP:
                        and a night mode.                     The slider limits depend on the selected light
                        The brightness can be set separately for the  mode.
                        day mode and for the night mode.
                                                              Unit setting screen
                                                              The display units for the multi-function dis-
                                    Set Brightness            play unit can be changed.

                                 DAY           NIGHT
                               100%           50%                           Set Unit


                                Save             Back
                                                                      US Unit      Metric Unit


                                                                      Save            Back




                                                                                               58]]></page><page Index="68"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 59  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation


                              Item            Function        To adjust the water depth setting:
                                       Sets the display units to
                             US Unit   US units.                                        1
                                       Sets the display units to
                            Metric Unit  metric units.
                                                              1  Slider control
                                       Saves the selected unit
                              Save     setting as the current units   To reduce the water depth setting, drag the
                                       and displays the setting   slider to the left.
                                       screen.
                                                              To increase the water depth setting, drag the
                                       Displays the setting screen   slider to the right.
                              Back     without saving the select-
                                       ed unit setting.       TIP:
                                                              If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                                                              depth alarm will not operate.
                        Depth alarm setting screen
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                                                              Maintenance setting screen
                        set.                                  This screen displays the number of hours that
                                                              the engines have been running since the last
                                                              maintenance.
                                     Depth Alarm
                                      4.0 ft                        Time Since Last Maintenance

                                                                  Port:    0.0 Hrs

                                Save             Back            Stbd:     0.0 Hrs


                                                                     Reset            Back
                              Item            Function
                                       Saves the set water depth
                              Save     as the current depth alarm   After maintenance  is performed, reset  the
                                       setting and displays the
                                       setting screen.        number of hours of operation as follows.
                                       Displays the setting screen
                              Back     without saving the set wa-  To reset the number of hours of operation:
                                       ter depth.             (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                                                                   1

                                                                  Reset                  Back

                                                              1  “Reset” button




                        59]]></page><page Index="69"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 60  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.                 Factory Reset
                        TIP:
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap  Reset all parameters to factory setting?
                        the “NO” button.
                                                                     Reset            Back
                              1

                             YES      Are you sure ?  NO

                        1  “YES” button                       To reset the settings:
                                                              (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                        Language setting screen
                        The language for the  multi-function  display  1
                        unit can be changed.
                                                                  Reset                  Back

                                                              1  “Reset” button
                                     Set Language
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                English        Francais          pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                                                                 settings.
                                       Espanol
                                                              TIP:
                                Save             Back         To return to the factory reset screen without
                                                              resetting the settings, tap the “NO” button.

                        Tap the desired language, and then tap the  1
                        “Save” button to save the setting.
                                                                   YES     Are you sure ?  NO
                        To display the setting screen without saving
                        the language setting, tap the “Back” button.
                                                              1  “YES” button
                        Factory reset screen
                        This screen can be used to reset the settings
                        to their factory default settings.












                                                                                               60]]></page><page Index="70"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 61  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.
                                             10 : 2 7 amm
                                             10:27 a
                                                                             Depth
                                         FUEL
                                                                             D Depth
                                         FUEL
                                                                              pth
                                         FUEL                                Depth
                                         FUELL
                                                         0
                                         10%
                                         10
                                         10
                                         10
                                           %
                                           %
                                           %
                                         100%        Fuel                     9ft ft ft ft
                                                                              9 9 9
                                                     Low Fuel Level  MPH NEXT
                                                         0 MPH
                                                                       QUIT
                                                                           Water Tempp
                                                                           W ater  T em
                                                              MP
                                                            g
                                                         .3 Av
                                                                G
                                                        0.3 Avg MPG
                                                        0
                                                                           79 . 3 ° F
                                                                           79.3°F
                                         12.3
                                         12.3VV
                                Name                               Function
                         NEXT                Displays the next active warning. When there is only 1 warning, the dis-
                                             played warning will not change.
                         QUIT                Closes the displayed warning.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                             10:27 a amm
                                              2
                                               7
                                             10
                                              :
                                         FUEL
                                         FUEL                                D Depth
                                                                             Depth
                                         FUEL
                                                                              pth
                                                                             Depth
                                         FUELL
                                    1    100%        Fuel 0                   9 9 9 9ft ft ft ft
                                         10
                                         10
                                         10
                                           %
                                           %
                                         10%
                                           %
                                                         0 MPH
                                                     Low Fuel Level
                                    2                           MPH NEXT
                                                                       QUIT
                                                                           W ater  T em
                                                                           Water Tempp
                                                                G
                                                         .3 Av
                                                              MP
                                                        0 0.3 Avg MPG
                                                            g
                                                                           79 . 3 ° F
                                                                           79.3°F
                                         12.3VV
                                         12.3
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                      Warning title                        Message
                         Check Engine                        Stop Port Engine.
                                                             Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure
                         Over Temperature
                         Check Engine                        Stop Starboard Engine.
                                                             Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure
                         Over Temperature
                        61]]></page><page Index="71"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 62  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                                      Warning title                        Message
                         Battery                             Low Voltage.
                                                             Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                             High Voltage.
                         Fuel                                Low Fuel Level
                         Depth                               Low Depth Level
                         Communication Error                 Port Engine
                                                             Starboard Engine
                                                             Engine CAN
                                                             No transducer found
                                                             No LIN Communications
                                                             Port Gauge
                                                             Starboard Gauge


                        The check  engine warning indicator is also  Low oil pressure warning
                        displayed on the tachometer for the engine  If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        with the warning.                     tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                                                              tion display and the buzzer  will sound. If a
                                                              fault is detected for an engine, “Low Oil Pres-
                                                              sure” will be displayed. At the same time, the
                                                              engine speed is automatically limited to help
                                                              prevent damage. If  this occurs,  reduce the
                                                              engine speed, return to shore or maneuver to
                                                              a safe location, and check the engine oil level.
                                                              (See page 152 for engine oil level checking
                                                              procedures.)
                                 1               1
                                                              If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                                                              raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-
                        1  Check engine warning indicator
                                                              ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the
                        Check engine warning                  engine.
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  Over temperature warning
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        sound. If a fault  is detected for an engine,  ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-  overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to  function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check  an  engine  is overheating, “Over Tempera-
                        the engine.                           ture” will be displayed. At the same time, the
                                                              engine speed is automatically limited to help
                                                              prevent damage. If this occurs, immediately
                                                              reduce the engine speed, return to shore or


                                                                                               62]]></page><page Index="72"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 63  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        maneuver to a safe location, and check for  NOTICE
                        water discharge at the cooling water pilot
                        outlets. There are cooling water pilot outlets  If  the cause  of overheating cannot  be
                        on the starboard side of the hull. Check that  found and corrected, take special precau-
                        water comes out of the outlets while the en-  tions to avoid major engine damage while
                        gines are running, particularly while applying  you return to shore.
                        throttle. If you do not see any water at the  Single engine overheating — Shut off the
                        outlets, cooling water may not be circulating  overheating engine and use the properly
                        in the engines.                       running engine to return to shore. Operate
                                                              at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-
                                                              vent water from flooding the non-operat-
                                                              ing engine through the water intake. See
                                                              page 64 for information  on the  no-wake
                                                              mode.
                                                              Both  engines overheating  — If getting a
                                                              tow from another vessel is not possible,
                                                              operate both engines just slightly above
                                                      2
                                                    1         idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                                                              towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                                                              226.
                        1  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        2  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                                                              Battery voltage warning
                        TIP:                                  If “Battery” appears on the multi-function dis-
                        If the cooling water passages in the engines  play and the buzzer will sound,  check  the
                        are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-  battery connections. If the battery connec-
                        ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.  tions are clean and tight and the warning in-
                                                              dication continues, have a Yamaha Boat
                        If water is not circulating, something may be  Dealer check the charging system.
                        clogging the intake  grates. Refer to “Jet
                        pump clean-out procedure” on page 214.  Communication error warning
                                                              If a generic error is detected, a warning will
                                                              appear on the multi-function display and the
                                                              buzzer will sound. If this occurs, reduce the
                                                              engine  speed, return to shore, and  have  a
                                                              Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.



                                   1


                        1  Intake grate


                        63]]></page><page Index="73"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 64  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Low fuel level warning                This is especially convenient when traveling
                        If “Fuel”  appears  on the multi-function dis-  in harbors, channels, or other areas posted
                        play and the buzzer will sound, refill the fuel  with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.
                        tank as soon as possible. (See page 150 for  The no-wake mode can be  activated only
                        information on filling the fuel tank.)  when the engines are operating at idle speed.
                                                              To activate the no-wake mode:
                        Depth warning                         (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE
                        If the  boat enters an area that is shallower  position or forward position so that both
                        than the water depth set for the depth alarm,  engines are operating at idle speed.
                        the depth warning will be activated and the  (2) Push the plus side of the no-wake
                        buzzer will sound.                       mode/cruise assist switch.  Once “No
                        If the warning is activated, move the boat to  Wake  Mode” is displayed in the multi-
                        an area that is deeper than the water depth  function  display, the no-wake mode is
                        set for the depth alarm. (See page 59 for in-  activated.
                        formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                                                                  10:27  am
                        No-wake mode/cruise assist switch
                                                               FUEL                          Depth
                        This switch activates and sets the no-wake  100%                      9ft
                        mode, cruise assist, and reverse RPM con-            0    MPH
                        trol.
                                                                         No Wake Mode
                                                                           0.3 Avg MPG     Water Temp
                                                                                           79.3°F
                                                               12.3V

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                            1                                 speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                                                              no-wake mode is activated, push the  plus
                                                              side  or minus side of  the no-wake
                                                              mode/cruise assist switch.
                        1  No-wake mode/cruise assist switch
                                                              To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        To operate the no-wake mode and cruise as-
                                                              Perform one of the following operations.
                        sist, see the following sections. To activate
                                                               Push the minus side of  the  no-wake
                        the reverse RPM control, see “Reverse RPM
                                                               mode/cruise assist switch until “No Wake
                        control” on page 65.
                                                               Mode” disappears.
                                                               Push the remote control levers forward to
                        Operating the boat with a minimal      open the throttle.
                        wake (no-wake mode)
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.


                                                                                               64]]></page><page Index="74"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 65  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Operating the boat at a steady speed   To deactivate the cruise assist:
                        (cruise assist)                       Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        The cruise assist feature is for steady engine  crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.
                        speed operation when the boat is traveling  Once “Cruise” disappears, the cruise assist is
                        above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is  deactivated.
                        available for  use whenever  the engines are
                        running above  4000  rpm and below  7000  Operating the boat in reverse with
                        rpm.                                  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        To activate the cruise assist:        Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        (1) Push the remote control levers forward  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                            to open the throttle until the desired en-  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                            gine speed is reached and both engines  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                            are operating at the same engine speed.  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        (2) Push the plus side or minus side of the  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                            no-wake mode/cruise assist switch.  boat may become unstable, which could
                            Once “Cruise” is displayed in the multi-  result in loss of control and an accident.
                            function display, the cruise assist is acti-  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                            vated.                            (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                                                                 ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                                                                 verse and both engines are operating at
                            10:27  am
                                                                 the same engine speed.
                          FUEL                          Depth
                                       0                         and then push the plus side of the no-
                         100%                           9ft   (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                                             MPH
                                                                 wake mode/cruise assist switch.
                                      Cruise +4
                                                              TIP:
                                      0.3 Avg MPG     Water Temp  Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                                      79.3°F
                         12.3V
                                                              pushing the plus side of  the no-wake
                                                              mode/cruise assist switch  will  increase the
                                                              available engine speed by approximately 500
                        TIP:
                                                              rpm in 3 stages up to a maximum of 6000
                         Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                                                              rpm, and  pushing the minus side will  de-
                          engine speed can be increased by pushing
                                                              crease the available engine speed. However,
                          the plus side of the switch or decreased by
                                                              the adjustment is limited to these 3 incre-
                          pushing the minus side. However, the ad-
                                                              ments.
                          justment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                          ments above or below the initial cruise
                                                              To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                          assist  setting. Each time the  switch is
                                                              Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                          pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                                                              crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                          decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.
                                                              rpm.
                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-
                          ing the remote control levers.
                        65]]></page><page Index="75"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 66  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Light operation                       switch in the middle position to turn off all
                        The light switches can be used to turn the  lights.
                        boat lights on or off.

                        Turning the courtesy light on or off
                        Push the courtesy light switch to turn on the       HORN
                        courtesy light inside the boat.
                                                                            BILGE
                                                                                     1
                                                                            NAVI
                                                                            ANC
                                                                           CTSY
                                                                           LIGHTS
                                      HORN
                                      BILGE
                                                              1  Navigation and anchor lights switch
                                       NAVI
                                       ANC
                                               1
                                      CTSY                    AR210
                                      LIGHTS
                        1  Courtesy light switch                      2
                                                                                        1









                                                              1  Bow light
                                                              2  Anchor light
                                     1
                                                              SX210

                        1  Courtesy light
                                                                         2
                        Turning the anchor light and bow light                          1
                        on or off
                        The navigation and anchor lights switch is a
                        toggle switch that controls the bow light and
                        anchor light. Push the right side of the switch
                        to turn on both the bow light and anchor light
                        for night running (“NAVI”). Push the left side
                        of the switch to operate the anchor light alone
                                                              1  Bow light
                        when anchored at  night (“ANC”). Put  the
                                                              2  Anchor light


                                                                                               66]]></page><page Index="76"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 67  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Horn switch
                        Push  this switch  to activate  the horn. The
                        horn can be used to signal other boats as re-
                        quired by the “Rules of the road”. (See page        HORN
                        24 for more information.)                                     1
                                                                            BILGE
                                                                            NAVI
                                                                            ANC
                                                                           CTSY
                                               1
                                                                           LIGHTS
                                      HORN
                                      BILGE
                                                              1  Bilge pump switch
                                       NAVI
                                       ANC
                                                              Switch circuit breakers
                                      CTSY
                                      LIGHTS
                                                              The electrical circuit for each switch is pro-
                                                              tected by a circuit breaker. If the button pops
                        1  Horn switch                        out, push it back in with your finger. If it pops
                                                              out again, ask a Yamaha Boat Dealer to in-
                        Ventilating the engine compartment    spect the electrical system.
                        Push the blower switch to turn on the blowers
                        to  ventilate the engine compartment. (See                    1
                        page 168 for more information.)
                                                                           BLOWER


                             1       BLOWER





                                                              1  Switch circuit breaker



                        1  Blower switch
                                                                            HORN
                                                                                       1
                        Draining the bilge water
                                                                            BILGE
                        Push the bilge pump switch to activate the
                        bilge pump. (See page 156 for more informa-         NAVI  ANC
                        tion.)                                             CTSY
                                                                           LIGHTS


                                                              1  Switch circuit breaker



                        67]]></page><page Index="77"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 68  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                              Helm controls (212 / 212S)

                                                       1           2




                                                                                3

                                                                                  4













                                                             6     5



                                                            12V   AUDIO
                                                                  AUX-USB



                        1  Phone holder
                        2  Multi-function display unit
                        3  Controller
                        4  Bilge pump indicator light
                        5  Aux input
                        6  12 V DC outlet


















                                                                                               68]]></page><page Index="78"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 69  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Accessory outlet                      For operating instructions, refer to the stereo
                        There is a 12 V DC outlet located on the star-  system owner’s manual included with your
                        board side of the steering wheel.     boat.
                         NOTICE
                        Do not use an automotive cigarette lighter
                        or other accessories that get hot because
                        the outlet can be damaged.                       1

                                                 1


                                                12V   AUDIO
                                                      AUX-USB
                                                              1  Remote control keypad

                                                              Bilge pump indicator light
                                                              This indicator light comes on while the bilge
                                                              pump is operating.

                        1  12 V DC outlet
                        Horn switch
                        Push  this switch  to activate  the horn. The
                        horn can be used to signal other boats as re-
                        quired by the “Rules of the road”. (See page
                        24 for more information.)


                                                                                1
                               1                              1  Bilge pump indicator light

                                                              TIP:
                              HORN
                                                              Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                              will operate every 2 minutes when the battery
                                                              switch is in the on position.


                        1  Horn switch

                        Remote control keypad
                        The remote control keypad is located on the
                        port side of the swim platform.



                        69]]></page><page Index="79"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 70  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                   USB charger                   Multi-function display unit
                        There is a USB charger on the deck. The USB       operation
                        charger can be used to charge external de-  Because the multi-function display unit is
                        vices.                                equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                                                              the display directly to operate the display
                                                              functions.
                                                              In addition to touching the display, you can
                                                              use the joystick to operate the display func-
                                                              tions.

                                                              Touching the multi-function display
                         1     5V
                               2A
                                                                    10:27 am
                                                                    13.0  V           13.0  V
                                                                 FUEL    NW  N   NE     DEPTH
                        1  USB charger cap                       100 %  START  SPEED  HOUSE  .8 9  ft

                                                                                 MPH

                                                                  1350RPM               1350RPM
                                                                      Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor


                                                              Using the joystick
                                                              This joystick has the following two operation
                                                              modes.
                                                               Volume control mode
                                                               Navigation control mode
                                                              Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                                                              switch the operation mode.

                                                                               1

                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL



                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                                                              1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                                                                                               70]]></page><page Index="80"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 71  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Volume control mode
                        Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                        volume.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                 1
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        1  Joystick knob                      plain how to make selections by touching the
                                                              display, you can also make selections using
                        Navigation control mode               the joystick knob.
                        (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                            lected setting or item.



                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                 1


                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE

                        1  Joystick knob
                        (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                            or confirm a setting.
















                        71]]></page><page Index="81"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 72  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                Operation buttons             running above 3000 rpm and  below  7000
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  rpm.
                        play directly, you can use the operation but-  To activate the cruise assist:
                        tons and the controller to operate  various  (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                        functions.                               to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                                                 gine speed is reached and both engines
                        Controller                               are operating at the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                      1  2 3                     or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When
                                                                 the cruise  assist is activated, “Cruise”
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)                and the cruise assist setting level will be
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                 displayed under the boat speed.
                                                                       NW      N      NE

                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                             SPEED
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                       4   5
                                Name           Function                                MPH
                         1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                          screen. (See page 78.)             Cruise +4
                         2  “VOLUME  –    Switches the joystick
                            (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume                   1
                            ton           control mode and the
                                          navigation control   1  Cruise assist setting level
                                          mode. When the main
                                          switches are turned to    Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                                          the on position, the
                                          volume control mode   engine speed can be increased by pushing
                                          is selected by default.  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                         3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-  creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                            ton           ly selected item.    WAKE” (–)  button. However, the  adjust-
                         4  “CRUISE/NO    Activate and set the   ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                            WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                            ton           mode, and reverse    ments above or below the initial cruise
                         5  “CRUISE/NO    RPM control. (See the   assist setting. Each time a button is
                            WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)  pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                            ton                                decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.
                                                               While the cruise assist is activated, the en-
                                                               gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-
                        Operating the boat at a steady speed
                                                               ing the remote control levers.
                        (cruise assist)
                        The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                                                              To deactivate the cruise assist:
                        speed operation when the boat is traveling
                                                              Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.
                        available for  use whenever  the engines are
                                                                                               72]]></page><page Index="82"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 73  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting  To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-  Perform one of the following operations.
                        ed.                                    Push  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button
                                                               repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.
                        Operating the boat with a minimal      Push the remote control levers forward to
                        wake (no-wake mode)                    open the throttle.
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  Operating the boat in reverse with
                        This is especially convenient when traveling  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        The no-wake mode can be used only when  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        the engines are operating at idle speed.  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                            position or forward position so that both  boat may become unstable, which could
                            engines are operating at idle speed.  result in loss of control and an accident.
                        (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                            ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-  (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                            ed, “No Wake” will be displayed under  ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            the boat speed.                      verse and both engines are operating at
                                                                 the same engine speed.
                                  NW     N       NE
                                                              (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                                                                 and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                                        SPEED
                                                                 (+) button.
                                                              Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                                              pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                 MPH
                                                              will increase the  available  engine speed by
                                       No Wake                approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                                                              maximum of 6000 rpm, and pushing the
                                         1                    “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                                                              the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                        1  “No Wake”
                                                              justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                        The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine  To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        no-wake  mode is activated, push  the  crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”    (+)  button  or  rpm.
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.







                        73]]></page><page Index="83"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 74  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                                     1                      2                      1

                                       10:27 a amm
                                         7
                                       10:2
                                                                               13.00
                                       13 . 0                                  13 .
                                       13.0
                                                                                      EPTH
                                                                                     DEPTH
                                 FUE      V V      NWNW     N N      NENE         V V  DEPTH
                                 FUEL
                                 FUEL
                                                                                      EPTH
                                 FUEL
                                100
                                100 %                                                  .8 9 8 .8 9 9 9  8 ft ft f ft
                                100
                                   %
                                   %
                                100%
                                                           PEE
                                                                                OUSE
                                       S START T          S SPEEDD             H HOUSE
                                        TAR
                                                                     MP H
                                                                     MPH
                                  1350  RPM                                        1350 0 RPM
                                  13
                                                                                   1350RPM
                                  1350RPM
                                                                                      RPM
                                                                     N
                                                                         Anchor
                                                                      a
                                                 B
                                                  l
                                            Bil g  Blower r          Navv  An c h or
                                            Bilgee
                                                  o
                                                    e
                                                   w
                                                            4            3
                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Status indicator bar















                                                                                               74]]></page><page Index="84"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 75  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Static bar

                                                2                      3
                                               10:27 am
                                               13.0                   13.0
                                         FUEL     V                      V  DEPTH
                                         100 %                                .8 9  ft
                                                START                  HOUSE
                                     1                                             4








                                     6                                             5

                                           1350RPM                        1350RPM


                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, orange, and red.
                          2  Start battery voltage val-  Displays the start battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             ue
                          3  House battery voltage   Displays the house battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value
                          4  Depth level         Displays the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the wa-
                                                 ter depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, orange, and
                                                 red.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Displays the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  Port engine tachometer  Displays the engine speed.


















                        75]]></page><page Index="85"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 76  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Center display

                                                                1
                                                      NW    N     NE
                                                           SPEED




                                                                  MPH




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen tab.


                        Screen tab bar

                                        1      2    3    4    5     6    7      8

                                       10:27  am

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 87.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 78.)
                          3  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 78.)
                          4  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 79.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 80.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 86.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 87.)
                          8  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.

















                                                                                               76]]></page><page Index="86"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 77  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar

                                             1    2         3         4    5

                                            Bilge  Blower            Nav  Anchor

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Indicates the operation setting of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is turned off, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is turned on, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Displays the operating status of the blowers. When the main
                                                 switches are turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 displayed in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Displays the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Displays the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.






























                        77]]></page><page Index="87"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 78  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen displays the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.
                           1             2             3       L                               D
                                                               %
                                   NW     N    NE
                                        SPEED



                                               MPH
                                                                                  MPH
                                                               50RPM                          135

                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Re-centers the map on
                         1  Boat speed*   Displays the boat                  your current location.
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per             Displays the heading of the
                                          hour.                              boat.
                         2  Heading       Displays the heading
                                          of the boat.
                                                                             Zooms out to display a
                         3  Cruise assist/  Displays the operating           more distant view of the
                            no-wake mode   status of the cruise as-          map.
                            status indicator  sist and no-wake
                                          mode.                              Zooms in to display a clos-
                                          When the cruise assist             er view of the map.
                                          is activated, “Cruise”
                                          and the cruise assist              Activates and deactivates
                                          setting level will be dis-         the tracking function that
                                          played.                            displays the route your
                                          When the no-wake                   boat has traveled.
                                          mode is activated, “No
                                          Wake” will be dis-                 Sets a waypoint mark.
                                          played.
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-
                         ter temperature will be displayed.
                                                              To use the waypoint marks:
                                                              (1) Tap the “  ” button.
                                                              (2) Tap the location of the desired waypoint
                                                                 mark on the map.










                                                                                               78]]></page><page Index="88"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 79  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                                         Trip screen
                                                              This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                         L                                D
                                                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                         %
                                                              tion.
                                      1
                                              2
                                                                               1        2 3
                                                                         NW    N     NE
                                                                       Fuel Economy:  23.0 MPG
                                            MPH                            Trip:
                          50RPM                         135                     262.8 Miles
                                                                         Fuel Used:  89.9 Gallons
                                                                         Fuel Flow:  5.0 GPH
                                                                        Water Temp:  81 °F
                        TIP:                                           Highest Speed:  0.2 MPH
                         You can tap multiple locations.
                         Once you  tap a location, a line will  be               MPH  Reset All
                          drawn from your current location to where  1  Menu
                          you tapped.                         2  Scrollbar
                        (3) Tap the “  ” button again to return to  3  “Reset All” button
                            the normal map display.
                                                              The menu displays 6 items at one time. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Water tempera-  Displays the ambient water
                                                              ture*         temperature in degrees
                                                              (Water Temp)  Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                                                            sius.
                                                              Average fuel   Displays the average dis-
                                                              consumption   tance that was traveled on
                                                              (Fuel Economy)  1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of fuel
                                                                            since the item was last re-
                                                                            set. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is displayed in
                                                                            miles and when liters are
                                                                            selected for the display
                                                                            units, the value is displayed
                                                                            in kilometers.
                                                              Trip distance   Displays the distance trav-
                                                              (Trip)        eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel used     Displays the total fuel that
                                                              (Fuel Used)   has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters since the
                                                                            item was last reset.



                        79]]></page><page Index="89"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 80  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                             Name            Function                   Media screen
                         Fuel flow*    Displays the total fuel con-  This screen can be used to receive a radio
                         (Fuel Flow)   sumption of the port and   broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                                       starboard engines in gal-
                                       lons per hour or liters per   ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                                       hour.                  form other functions.
                         Highest speed   Displays the highest speed
                         (Highest Speed)  of the boat in miles per hour
                                       or kilometers per hour since          Source
                                       the item was last reset.
                         Average speed   Displays the average boat       AM Radio   FM Radio
                         (Average Speed)  speed in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour since          USB       Bluetooth
                                       the item was last reset.
                                                                               Auxiliary
                         Engine hours*   Displays the total number of
                         (Engine Hours)  hours that the engines have
                                       been running since the boat   Settings  Select a Source  Turn ON
                                       was new.
                        * This item cannot be reset.
                                                                   Item            Function
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:                 Switches the source to the
                                                                    AM Radio  AM radio tuner and dis-
                        Touch and hold the item that you want to re-         plays the AM radio screen.
                        set for several seconds.
                                                                             Switches the source to the
                                                                    FM Radio  FM radio tuner and dis-
                        To reset all of the display items:                   plays the FM radio screen.
                        Tap the “Reset All” button to reset all of the       Switches the source to an
                        items.                                      Bluetooth  external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                                             Switches the source to the
                                                                    Auxiliary  auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                                             Switches the source to the
                                                                     USB     device connected to the
                                                                             USB terminal and displays
                                                                             the USB screen.
                                                                             Displays the main audio
                                                                  Settings   setting screen.

                                                                             Turns the audio system on
                                                                  Turn ON   /   or off.
                                                                  Turn OFF







                                                                                               80]]></page><page Index="90"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 81  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        To change the volume:                      Item            Function
                        The following slider is displayed in each            Decreases the volume lev-
                        screen.                                              el. Tap this button to de-
                                                                             crease the volume by 1
                                         1                                   level, and touch and hold
                                                                             the button to decrease the
                                                                             volume level continuously.
                                                                             Increases the volume level.
                                                                             Tap this button to increase
                        1  Slider control                                    the volume by 1 level, and
                                                                             touch and hold the button
                        To decrease the volume level, drag the slider        to increase the volume lev-
                                                                             el continuously.
                        to the left. To increase the volume level, drag
                                                                             Displays the media screen.
                        the slider to the right.
                                                                   Source
                        TIP:
                        The lock mark “  ” appears when the entire
                                                              To change the radio station frequency:
                        audio system is turned off or an external de-
                                                              Tap a preset list button or preset button.
                        vice is not connected.
                                                                               1
                        Radio screen (AM/FM)
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.            FM-1    FM-2    FM-3
                                                                            FM Radio
                                                                             Playing
                                 FM-1    FM-2    FM-3
                                       FM Radio                              107.7MHz
                                        Playing                    P1  107.7  P2  103.5  P3  103.1  P4  102.7  P5  107.7
                                        107.7MHz
                                                                               2
                              P1  107.7  P2  103.5  P3  103.1  P4  102.7  P5  107.7
                                                              1  Preset list button
                                                              2  Preset button
                            Settings               Source
                                                              To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                              Item            Function
                                                              Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and   and then touch and hold the desired preset
                                       hold this button to auto-  button for 3 seconds.
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                       Increases the radio station   Bluetooth screen
                                       frequency. Touch and hold   Smartphones and other external devices that
                                       this button to automatically   are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                                       seek the next available ra-
                                       dio station.           nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-




                        81]]></page><page Index="91"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 82  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices  Audio track information
                        through the audio system’s speakers.
                                                                       Bluetooth - Connect Device ...
                                Bluetooth - Connect Device ...  1          Paradise Circus
                                                               2             Massive Attack
                                                               3              Heligoland




                                                                   Settings               Source
                            Settings               Source
                                                              1  Song title
                                                              2  Artist name
                              Item            Function
                                                              3  Album title
                                       Displays information about
                                       the current audio track.
                                                              To connect an external device:
                                                              Multi-function display:
                                       Selects the previous audio
                                       track.                 (1) Tap the “  ” button.
                                                              (2) Tap the “Discoverable” checkbox.
                                       Selects the next audio
                                       track.
                                                                              Menu
                                       Pauses or resumes the            chris.s iPhone
                               /       playback of the audio            iPhone (2)
                                       track.                           Thomas’ iPhone
                                       Pairs an external device         Samsung Galaxy S
                                       that is compatible with          SAMSUNG-SM-G870A
                                       Bluetooth.                       Discoverable
                                       Decreases the volume lev-                         Back
                                       el. Tap this button to de-
                                       crease the volume by 1
                                       level, and touch and hold
                                       the button to decrease the
                                       volume level continuously.  External device:
                                       Increases the volume level.   (1) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                       Tap this button to increase   ternal  device, and  then search for the
                                       the volume by 1 level, and
                                       touch and hold the button   multi-function display unit (MS-RA70) of
                                       to increase the volume lev-  the boat.
                                       el continuously.       TIP:
                                       Displays the media screen.   The displayed name of the multi-function
                             Source
                                                               display unit varies according to the external
                                                               device.
                                                               Make sure that other external devices have
                                                               their Bluetooth function disabled before


                                                                                               82]]></page><page Index="92"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 83  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                          beginning the  pairing process to reduce
                          connection issues.
                                                                            Auxiliary
                        (2) Select the multi-function display unit of
                            the boat to connect to it.
                        TIP:
                        When an external device is connected using
                        Bluetooth wireless technology,  the audio
                        tracks will automatically start playing.
                                                                  Settings               Source
                        To disconnect an external device:
                        Tap  the “  Turn OFF  ” button to disconnect
                        the connected device.
                                                              To connect to the auxiliary input jack:
                                                              Open the “AUDIO AUX-USB” cap and con-
                                       Source
                                                              nect the device to the auxiliary input jack.
                                   AM Radio    FM Radio
                                                                                            1
                                     USB      Bluetooth

                                         Auxiliary
                                                                                      12V  AUDIO
                                                                                            AUX-USB
                            Settings  Select a Source  Turn OFF
                                                     1
                        1  “Turn OFF” button

                        TIP:
                                                              1  “AUDIO AUX-USB” cap
                         You can also disconnect an external device
                          by turning it off.                  TIP:
                         If you connect another device, the currently   You can adjust the volume level of  the
                          connected device will be disconnected.  speakers using the multi-function display
                                                               unit or the volume control of the external
                        Auxiliary screen                       device.
                        Portable media players  and other external   To select the audio tracks, use the external
                        devices can be connected to the audio sys-  device.
                        tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                        devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                                              USB screen
                        ers.                                  USB flash drives and other external devices
                                                              can be connected to the USB terminal to lis-
                                                              ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                                                              through the audio system’s speakers.




                        83]]></page><page Index="93"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 84  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                              Location of the USB terminal

                                        USB                                                 1

                                                                                      12V  AUDIO
                                                                                            AUX-USB




                            Settings               Source


                              Item            Function
                                                              1  “AUDIO AUX-USB” cap
                                       Repeats the playback of
                                       the audio track.
                                                              TIP:
                                                               Open the “AUDIO AUX-USB” cap and con-
                                       Shuffles the order in which
                                       the audio tracks are played   nect to the USB terminal.
                                       back.                   If an external device that is already paired
                                       Selects the previous audio   using Bluetooth is connected to the USB
                                       track.                  terminal, the audio system may not oper-
                                                               ateproperly.  When charging an  external
                                       Pauses or resumes the   device, be sure to use one of the USB char-
                               /       playback of the audio
                                       track.                  gers. (See page 70 for information on the
                                       Selects the next audio   USB chargers.)
                                       track.
                                                              Main audio setting screen
                                       Displays information about   The settings of the  audio system can  be
                                       the current audio track.
                                                              changed.
                                       Displays the list of audio
                                       tracks.
                                                                            Media Setting
                                       Displays the media screen.
                             Source                                   Balance/Fader  Bass/Mid/Treble

                                                                             Equalizer

                                                                           Select a Setting  Back


                                                                   Item            Function
                                                                             Displays the balance/fader
                                                                 Balance/Fader  setting screen.



                                                                                               84]]></page><page Index="94"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 85  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation


                              Item            Function        TIP:
                                       Displays the bass/mid/tre-  The settings can also be adjusted by drag-
                           Bass/Mid/Treble  ble setting screen.  ging the blue dot.

                                       Displays the equalizer set-  Bass/mid/treble setting screen
                             Equalizer  ting screen.

                                       Displays the media screen.
                                                                          Bass / Mid / Treble
                              Back
                                                                              TREBLE
                                                                               +6
                                                                              MIDDLE
                                                                               -1
                        Balance/fader setting screen
                                                                              BASS
                        The currently selected levels for the balance          +6
                        and fader are indicated by a blue dot on the
                        illustration of the boat.                                        Back
                                      Balance / Fader
                                                                   Item            Function
                                         Left
                                                                             Decreases the setting lev-
                                                                             el.
                              Rear                  Front
                                                                             Increases the setting level.
                                         Right
                                                    Back
                                                                             Displays the main audio
                                                                   Back      setting screen.
                                  1
                        1  Blue dot
                                                              Equalizer setting screen
                              Item            Function
                                       Increase the balance and
                              Rear     fader levels. Tap a button            Equalizer
                                       to adjust the setting by 1
                                       level, and touch and hold
                                       the button to adjust the
                              Left     setting continuously.


                              Front                                      Flat  Pop  Rock  Classic
                                                                                         Back

                              Right
                                                              TIP:
                                       Displays the main audio   The 4  available modes are  “Flat”,  “Pop”,
                              Back     setting screen.        “Rock”, and “Classic”.



                        85]]></page><page Index="95"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 86  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                             System control screen            To  adjust the brightness  of the  courtesy
                        The system control screen can be used to  lights:
                        turn the boat lights, blowers, and bilge pump  Use the slider control to adjust the brightness
                        on and off.                           of the courtesy lights.
                        When a light is turned on, it will be indicated        1
                        on the illustration of the boat displayed on the
                        screen.

                                                              1  Slider control
                            Dock
                           Interior                   Ballast
                                                              TIP:
                          Navigation                  Blower  The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                           Anchor                      Bilge  ping the “   ” or “    ” button.






                              Item            Function
                                       Turns the docking lights on
                              Dock     or off.

                                       Turns the courtesy lights
                                       on or off. The slider indi-
                             Interior  cates the brightness of the
                                       lights while they are turned
                                       on.
                                       Turns the anchor light and
                            Navigation  bow light on or off.

                                       Turns the anchor light on
                                       or off. If this button is
                             Anchor    tapped while the naviga-
                                       tion lights are turned on,
                                       the bow light will turn off.
                                       Turns the blowers on or off.
                             Blower    (See page 168.)

                                       Displays the ballast set-
                             Ballast   ting screen.

                                       Turns the bilge pump on or
                              Bilge    off. (See page 157.)





                                                                                               86]]></page><page Index="96"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 87  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Setting screen
                        The setting screen can be used to change the
                                                                             Set Time
                        settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                                                       8     9 9     am

                                        Menu                           9     0 0     pm
                                                                      10     1 1     am
                                   Time       Depth
                                   Unit     Brightness
                                                                   Save                  Back
                                  Wellness   Language
                                                                   Item            Function
                                      Select a Menu  Reset
                                                                             Saves the set time as the
                                                                   Save      current time and displays
                                                                             the setting screen.
                              Item            Function
                                                                             Displays the setting screen
                                       Displays the time setting             without saving the set
                              Time     screen.                     Back      time.

                                       Displays the depth alarm   TIP:
                              Depth    setting screen.
                                                              When “US Unit” is selected, the time is dis-
                                                              played in the 12-hour format. When “Metric
                                       Displays the unit setting
                              Unit     screen.                Unit” is selected, the time is displayed in the
                                                              24-hour format.
                                       Displays the brightness
                            Brightness  setting screen.       Brightness setting screen
                                                              The multi-function display has a day mode
                                       Displays the maintenance   and a night mode.
                             Wellness  setting screen.
                                                              The brightness can be set separately for the
                                                              day mode and for the night mode.
                                       Displays the language set-
                             Language  ting screen.
                                                                           Set Brightness
                                       Displays the factory reset
                              Reset    screen.
                                                                     Night Brightness  Day Brightness
                                                                       50%       100%

                        Time setting screen
                        Tap the time unit that you want to set and
                                                                   Save                  Back
                        scroll up or down.






                        87]]></page><page Index="97"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 88  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                              Item            Function        Tap the desired language, and then tap the
                                       Displays the current night   “Save” button to save the setting.
                           Night Brightness  mode setting.    To display the setting screen without saving
                                                              the language setting, tap the “Back” button.
                                       Displays the current day
                           Day Brightness  mode setting.
                                                              Unit setting screen
                                                              The display units for the multi-function dis-
                                       Saves the set brightness
                              Save     as the brightness level set-  play unit can be changed.
                                       ting and displays the set-
                                       ting screen.
                                       Displays the setting screen           Set Unit
                              Back     without saving the set
                                       brightness level.                   US Unit
                                                                        US Unit   Metric Unit
                        To adjust the brightness:
                        To make the display darker, drag the slider to
                        the left. To make the display brighter, drag  Save               Back
                        the slider to the right.

                                                  1                Item            Function
                                                                             Sets the display units to
                                                                   US Unit   US units.

                        1  Slider control                                    Sets the display units to
                                                                  Metric Unit  metric units.
                        TIP:
                                                                             Saves the selected unit
                        The default settings are 75%  for  the  day
                                                                   Save      setting as the current units
                        mode and 50% for the night mode.                     and displays the setting
                                                                             screen.
                        Language setting screen                              Displays the setting screen
                                                                             without saving the select-
                        The language for the  multi-function  display  Back
                                                                             ed unit setting.
                        unit can be changed.
                                                              Depth alarm setting screen
                                      Set Language
                                                              The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                                     English                  set.

                                  English    Español
                                       Français
                             Save                   Back




                                                                                               88]]></page><page Index="98"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 89  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation




                                      Depth Alarm                      Time Since Last Maintenance
                                                                            Port Engine
                                        0.0 ft
                                                                              0Hrs
                                                                          Starboard Engine
                                                                              0Hrs
                             Save                   Back          Reset                  Back

                              Item            Function        After maintenance  is performed, reset  the
                                       Saves the set water depth   number of hours of operation as follows.
                              Save     as the current depth alarm
                                       setting and displays the   To reset the number of hours of operation:
                                       setting screen.
                                                              (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                                       Displays the setting screen
                              Back     without saving the set wa-
                                       ter depth.                  1
                                                                  Reset                  Back
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                                                              1  “Reset” button
                                                  1
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                                                 pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                                                                 number of hours of operation.
                        1  Slider control                     TIP:
                                                              To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        To reduce the water depth setting, drag the
                                                              without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        slider to the left.
                                                              the “NO” button.
                        To increase the water depth setting, drag the
                        slider to the right.                       1
                        TIP:
                        If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the  YES  Are you sure ?  NO
                        depth alarm will not operate.
                                                              1  “YES” button
                        Maintenance setting screen
                                                              Factory reset screen
                        This screen displays the number of hours that
                                                              This screen can be used to reset the settings
                        the engines have been running since the last
                                                              to their factory default settings.
                        maintenance.





                        89]]></page><page Index="99"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 90  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation




                                      Factory Reset

                                Reset all parameters to
                                   factory settings?



                             Reset                  Back


                        To reset the settings:
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                              1

                             Reset                  Back

                        1  “Reset” button

                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            settings.
                        TIP:
                        To return to the factory reset screen without
                        resetting the settings, tap the “NO” button.

                              1

                             YES      Are you sure ?  NO
                        1  “YES” button


















                                                                                               90]]></page><page Index="100"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 91  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.
                                           10:27 am
                                           10 : 27 am
                                           13.0 0  V V                     13.0 . 0  V V
                                                                           13
                                            .
                                           13
                                      FUEL
                                      FUEL           NWNW   N N    NENE         DEPTHEPTH
                                      FUE
                                      FUEL
                                      FUEL
                                                                                DEPTH
                                                                                EPTH
                                       10
                                       10
                                       10
                                       10
                                        %
                                        %
                                        %
                                      100%                 S SPEEDPEED           .8 9 8 .8 9 9 9 8  ft ft f ft
                                        %
                                            TAR
                                                                            U
                                            STARTT                         HO HOUSEE S
                                            S
                                                   Fuel Level
                                                   Low Fuel Level
                                                                          NEXT
                                                                          QUIT
                                                                   MPH
                                                                   MPH
                                        1350  RPM                             1350 0 RPM
                                        13
                                                                                 RPM
                                                                              1350RPM
                                        1350RPM
                                                                        h
                                                Bilgee
                                                Bilg  Bl o w e r    Nav v  Anchoror
                                                   Blower
                                                                    N
                                                                    a
                                                                        c
                                                                       An
                                Name                               Function
                         NEXT                Displays the next active warning. When there is only 1 warning, the dis-
                                             played warning will not change.
                         QUIT                Closes the displayed warning.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                           10:27 am
                                           10 : 27  am
                                            .
                                                                           13.0
                                           13
                                           13.0 0  V V                     13 . 0  V V
                                                                                DEPTH
                                      FUEL
                                      FUEL           NWNW   N N    NENE         DEPTHEPTH
                                      FUEL
                                      FUEL
                                      FUE
                                                                                EPTH
                                       10
                                       10
                                       10
                                       10
                                        %
                                        %
                                        %
                                        %
                                      100%                                       .8 9 8 .8 9 9 9  8  ft ft f ft
                                            S
                                                                           HO
                                            STARTT         S SPEEDPEED     HOUSEE S
                                            TAR
                                                                            U
                                  1                Fuel Level
                                                   Low Fuel Level         NEXT
                                  2
                                                                          QUIT
                                                                   MPH
                                                                   MPH
                                        1350  RPM                             1350 0 RPM
                                        13
                                                                              1350RPM
                                                                                 RPM
                                        1350RPM
                                                   Bl
                                                    o
                                                Bilg  Blower r      N Nav v  An c h
                                                Bilgee
                                                                    a
                                                                       Anchoror
                                                     w
                                                     e
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        91]]></page><page Index="101"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 92  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Warning example
                                      Warning title                        Message
                         Check Engine                        Stop Port Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                         Check Engine                        Stop Starboard Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                         House Battery                       Low Voltage.
                                                             Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                             High Voltage.
                         Start Battery                       Low Voltage.
                                                             Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                             High Voltage.
                         Fuel Level                          Low Fuel Level
                         Depth                               Low Depth Level
                         Port Engine                         Maintenance Due
                         Starboard Engine                    Maintenance Due
                         Communication Error                 Port Engine.
                                                             Starboard Engine.
                                                             SPU25-15.
                                                             Depth transducer.
                                                             Joystick.
                                                             Pump controller.
                                                             SPU25-15, joystick and Depth transducer
                                                             Engine CAN.
                                                             Stereo.
                                                             GPS.






















                                                                                               92]]></page><page Index="102"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 93  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  water comes out of the outlets while the en-
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  gines are running, particularly while applying
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  throttle. If you do not see any water at the
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  outlets, cooling water may not be circulating
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-                     2
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a                     1
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 166 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 214.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine is over heating, “Over Tempera-
                        ture” will be displayed. At the same time, the
                                                                        1
                        engine speed is automatically limited to help
                        prevent damage. If this occurs, immediately
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore or
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        maneuver to a safe location, and check for
                        water discharge at the cooling water pilot
                        outlets. There are cooling water pilot outlets
                        on the starboard side of the hull. Check that



                        93]]></page><page Index="103"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 94  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               fuel tank as soon as possible. (See page 150
                                                              for information on filling the fuel tank.)
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  Depth warning
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        you return to shore.                  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        overheating engine and use the properly  buzzer will sound.
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  set for the depth alarm. (See page 88 for in-
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        page 73 for  information on the no-wake
                        mode.
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        226.

                        House/Start Battery voltage warning
                        If “House Battery” “Start Battery” appears on
                        the multi-function display and the buzzer will
                        sound, check the battery connections. If the
                        battery connections are clean and tight and
                        the warning indication continues, have a
                        Yamaha Boat Dealer check the charging sys-
                        tem.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.

                        Low fuel level warning
                        If “Fuel Level” appears on the multi-function
                        display and the buzzer will sound, refill the


                                                                                               94]]></page><page Index="104"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 95  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Helm controls (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD)






                                                     1          3





                                   2














                                                                 4         5



                                                                   12V


                                                                   BILGE
                                                                         HORN
                                                                7             6




                        1  Phone holder
                        2  Multi-function display unit (page 101)
                        3  Controller (page 98)
                        4  12 V DC outlet (page 96)
                        5  Aux input jack (page 113)
                        6  “HORN” switch (page 96)
                        7  “BILGE” switch (page 96)







                        95]]></page><page Index="105"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 96  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Accessory outlet                      “HORN” switch
                        There is a 12 V DC outlet located on the star-  Activates the horn. The horn can be used to
                        board side of the steering wheel.     signal other boats as required by the “Rules
                         NOTICE                               of the road”. (See page 24.)
                                                              The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        Do not use an automotive cigarette lighter  operating.
                        or other accessories that get hot because
                        the outlet can be damaged.            “BILGE” switch
                                                              Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page
                                                              157.)
                                             1
                                                              The switch light  comes on while the  bilge
                                                              pump is operating.
                                                              TIP:
                                                12V
                                                              Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                              will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                                                              battery switch is in the on position.
                                                BILGE
                                                     HORN


                        1  12 V DC outlet
                        Switch panel
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                        erate various functions.



                                                12V


                                                BILGE
                                                     HORN
                                             1           2




                        1  “BILGE” switch
                        2  “HORN” switch









                                                                                               96]]></page><page Index="106"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 97  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                           Multi-function display unit        Volume control mode
                                    operation                 Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                                                              volume.
                        Because the multi-function display unit is
                        equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        the display directly to operate  the display
                        functions.                                            VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                        In addition to touching the display, you can       HOME   CANCEL
                        use the joystick to operate the display func-
                        tions.                                                         1

                        Touching the multi-function display                 CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                                                 RUNNING MODE
                                      SE  S  SW
                             FUEL                    DEPTH
                             100 %                   .8 9  ft  Navigation control mode
                              19                    19
                                                              (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                                  x1000 rpm     x1000 rpm
                                         MPH
                              START                 HOUSE
                              13.0  V  9          9  13.0  V     lected setting or item.
                                   Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        Using the joystick
                        This joystick has the following two operation                  1
                        modes.
                         Volume control mode                               CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                         Navigation control mode
                        Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                        switch the operation mode.            1  Joystick knob
                                         1                    (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                                                                 or confirm a setting.
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL



                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                        1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                        97]]></page><page Index="107"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 98  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                                     Operation buttons
                                                              In addition to touching the multi-function dis-
                                                              play directly, you can use the operation but-
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL            tons and the controller to operate  various
                                                              functions.
                                                              Controller
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                           1   2 3
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        TIP:
                        Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        plain how to make selections by touching the
                        display, you can also make selections using         CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                        the joystick knob.
                                                                             4   5
                                                                      Name          Function
                                                               1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                                                               screen. (See page
                                                                               105.)
                                                               2  “VOLUME  –   Switches the joystick
                                                                  (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                                                                  ton          control mode and the
                                                                               navigation control
                                                                               mode. When the main
                                                                               switches are turned to
                                                                               the on position, the
                                                                               volume control mode
                                                                               is selected by default.
                                                               3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                                                                  ton          ly selected item.
                                                               4  “CRUISE/NO   Activate and set the
                                                                  WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                                                                  ton          mode, and reverse
                                                               5  “CRUISE/NO   RPM control. (See the
                                                                  WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)
                                                                  ton


                                                              Operating the boat at a steady speed
                                                              (cruise assist)
                                                              The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                                                              speed operation when the boat is traveling
                                                              above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is


                                                                                               98]]></page><page Index="108"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 99  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        available for  use whenever  the engines are  To deactivate the cruise assist:
                        running above  3000  rpm and below  7000  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        rpm.                                  crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.
                        To activate the cruise assist:        When “Cruise” and the cruise assist setting
                        (1) Push the remote control levers forward  level disappear, the cruise assist is deactivat-
                            to open the throttle until the desired en-  ed.
                            gine speed is reached and both engines
                            are operating at the same engine speed.  Operating the boat with a minimal wake
                        (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button  (no-wake mode)
                            or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When  The no-wake mode is useful for operating the
                            the cruise assist is activated, “Cruise”  boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.
                            and the cruise assist setting level will be  This is especially convenient when traveling
                            displayed under the boat speed.   in harbors, channels, or other areas posted
                                                              with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.
                                  SE      S      SW           The no-wake mode can be  activated only
                                                              when the engines are operating at idle speed.
                                                              To activate the no-wake mode:
                                                              (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE
                                                                 position or forward position so that both
                                                                 engines are operating at idle speed.
                                         MPH
                                                              (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-
                                       Cruise +4
                                                                 ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-
                                           1                     ed, “No Wake” will be displayed under
                                                                 the boat speed.
                        1  Cruise assist setting level
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                         Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                          engine speed can be increased by pushing
                          the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                          creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                          WAKE” (–) button. However, the  adjust-
                                                                              MPH
                          ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                          ments above or below the initial cruise            No Wake
                          assist setting. Each  time a button is
                          pushed, the engine speed will increase or            1
                          decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.  1  “No Wake”
                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                          ing the remote control levers.      speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                                                              no-wake  mode is activated, push the
                                                              “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                                                              “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.


                        99]]></page><page Index="109"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 100  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the no-wake mode:       To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Perform one of the following operations.  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                         Push the “CRUISE/NO  WAKE” (–) button  crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                          repeatedly until “No Wake” disappears.  rpm.
                         Push the remote control levers forward to
                          open the throttle.
                        TIP:
                        212SD / 212XE: If  the throttle/shift paddles
                        are operated in the DRiVE mode while the no-
                        wake mode is activated, the no-wake mode
                        will be deactivated.


                        Operating the boat in reverse with more
                        thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be pre-
                        pared to reduce throttle as soon  as the
                        boat moves  as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        boat may become unstable, which could
                        result in loss of control and an accident.
                        To activate the reverse RPM control:
                        (1) Move the remote control levers back-
                            ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            verse and both engines are operating at
                            the same engine speed.
                        (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                            and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                            (+) button.
                        Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                        pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                        will increase the available  engine speed by
                        approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                        maximum  of 6000 rpm, and pushing  the
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                        the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                        justment is limited to these 3 increments.







                                                                                             100]]></page><page Index="110"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 101  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                              1         2          3        4                   5         6
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                                     SE     S      SW
                           FUEL                                                             DEPTH
                           100 %                                                            .8 9  ft

                               19                                                        19
                                        x1000 rpm                             x1000 rpm
                                                           MPH
                              START                                                     HOUSE
                              13.0  V  9                                           9    13.0  V
                                          Bilge  Blower               Nav  Anchor
                           15 14 13     12                 11                 10     9   8   7
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Shows the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 114.)
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Shows the engine speed.
                          3  Center display      Shows various information for each screen tab.
                          4  Screen tab bar      Shows the tabs for the various screens that can be shown on the
                                                 center display.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Shows the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  Mode status         Shows the current mode. (See page 104.)
                          7  Depth level bar graph  Shows the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the depth
                                                 alarm setting and detected water depth, the color of the bar graph
                                                 segments changes.
                          8  House battery voltage  Shows the house battery voltage in a bar graph format and numer-
                                                 ical format.
                          9  Operation mode button  Switches the operation mode. This button can be used only when
                                                 the remote control levers are in the neutral position. (See page
                                                 104.)
                         10  Starboard shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the starboard jet thrust nozzle.
                                                 This indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         11  Status indicator bar  Shows the operating status of various functions and displays warn-
                                                 ings.
                         12  Port shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the port jet thrust nozzle. This
                                                 indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         13  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on the
                                                 warnings present.
                         14  Start battery voltage  Shows the start battery voltage in a bar graph format and numeri-
                                                 cal format.
                         15  Fuel level bar graph  Shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending on
                                                 the amount of remaining fuel, the color of the bar graph segments
                                                 changes.

                        101]]></page><page Index="111"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 102  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        If the multi-function display unit is turned on while the engines are stopped, the display unit
                        will enter the float mode.
                        When the multi-function display unit is in the float mode, the following items are different than
                        they are in the running mode.
                                                  1                   2

                                                                        FLOAT MODE

                                FUEL                                                  DEPTH
                                 100 %       FM Radio                                 .8 9  ft

                                                                   Water Temp
                                      19  107.7 MHz                               19
                                                Her By                    °F



                                     START                                        HOUSE
                                    13.0  V  9                              9    13.0  V
                                                   Bilge  B       Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Audio system function  Shows the selected function of the audio system.
                          2  Water temperature   Shows the ambient water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or
                                                 degrees Celsius.


                        Screen tab bar
                                          1     2     3     4     5     6     7




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 105.)
                          2  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 105.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 109.)
                          4  Drive control screen tab  Displays the drive control screen. (See page 110.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 111.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 114.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 114.)




                                                                                             102]]></page><page Index="112"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 103  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar

                                        1      2            3            4      5

                                       Bilge  Blower                    Nav   Anchor

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Shows the operating status of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is stopped, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is operating, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Shows the operating status of the blowers. When the house bat-
                                                 tery switch is turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 shown in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Shows the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Shows the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.






























                        103]]></page><page Index="113"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 104  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Operation mode                        DRiVE mode “  ” (212SD / 212XD)
                        When the engines are running and both re-  Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        mote control levers are in the neutral position,  gine speed and  the throttle  and shifting of
                        the operation mode can be changed by tap-  both engines are controlled using the left and
                        ping the operation mode button.       right throttle/shift paddles. “DRiVE” is shown
                                                              for the mode status.
                                         1     2
                                                              Use this mode to make small throttle adjust-
                                                              ments  when operating  the boat at  slow
                                        RUNNING MODE
                                                              speeds, such as when docking. (See page 47
                              SW
                               NE
                                                  DEPTH       for information on the throttle/shift paddles.)
                                                  .8 9  ft
                                               19
                                       x1000 rpm              TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are moved from
                          H
                                               HOUSE           the neutral position to the forward or re-
                                           9   13.0  V
                                 Nav  Anchor                   verse position while the throttle/shift pad-
                                                               dles are not being operated, the operation
                        1  Mode status
                        2  Operation mode button               mode will change to the running mode.
                                                               When the DRiVE mode is activated, the en-
                        Float mode                             gine speed will be controlled.
                        Both engines are stopped. “FLOAT-MODE”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The audio system function and water temper-
                        ature are shown instead of the port and star-
                        board tachometers.

                        Running mode “  ”
                        The port and starboard remote control levers
                        control the throttle and shifting for their re-
                        spective engines.  “RUNNING-MODE” is
                        shown for the mode status.

                        Single lever mode “  ”
                        Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        gine  speed and the throttle  and shifting of
                        both  engines are  controlled using only  the
                        port remote control lever. “SINGLE-LEVER”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The starboard remote control lever is not
                        used.






                                                                                             104]]></page><page Index="114"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 105  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen shows the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.
                           1             2             3
                                   SE     S    SW





                                         MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                                                                                         REC
                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Shows the direction of
                         1  Boat speed    Shows the boat speed               North at the top of the
                                          in miles per hour or ki-           screen, or the current
                                          lometers per hour.                 course being traveled at
                                                                             the top of the screen.
                         2  Heading       Shows the heading of
                                          the boat.
                         3  Cruise  as-   Shows whether the                  Zooms out to display a
                            sist/no-wake   cruise assist or no-              more distant view of the
                            mode status in-  wake mode is activat-           map.
                            dicator       ed.                                Zooms in to display a clos-
                                          When the cruise assist             er view of the map.
                                          is activated, “Cruise”
                                          and the cruise assist
                                          setting level will be dis-         Displays the Map Settings.
                                          played.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No
                                          Wake” will be dis-                 Records and Stops record-
                                          played.                    REC     ing a Track.

                                                                             Adds a waypoint.




                                                              Waypoint
                                                              Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.
                                                              Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                              The  “Add Waypoint”  screen is displayed
                                                              when a waypoint is attached.






                        105]]></page><page Index="115"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 106  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To add a Waypoint:                         Item            Function
                        (1) Display the location you want to attach a  GoTo  Provides the distance to
                            waypoint to on the map.                          the waypoint, along with
                                                                             the latitude and longitude.
                        (2) Tap “   ”.
                                                                             It also tells when you have
                        (3) Switch  to the “Add Waypoint”  screen,           arrived at the waypoint and
                            and select any letters.                          asks if you would like to
                                                                             stop the navigation.
                                                              Delete         Deletes the waypoint.
                                                              EDIT           Changes the name of the
                                                                             waypoint.
                                                              Cruising to the destination:
                                                              (1) Select the waypoint created on the map.
                                     1
                                                              (2) Tap “GOTO”.
                                            2
                              NEXT WAYPOINT 1.7 km
                                   29°
                                                                      BAY
                                            MPH
                                                    REC
                                                                      Distance:  12.06
                                                                      Lat: 45.28001
                        (4) Tap “Save”.                               Lon: -92.97718
                        When the waypoint is set, “Waypoint Manag-
                        er” is displayed, and the latitude and longi-
                        tude of the set waypoint are displayed along
                                                                        Delete     Edit
                        with the distance from the current location.
                                                              TIP:
                                   Waypoint Manager
                                                              To stop tracking, tap “STOP”.
                                  GR8            EDIT
                                                              Map settings screen
                                 Lat:        26.9484
                                                              Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                                 Lon:        -80.0968
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                 Distance:    204.39  m
                           Close   Delete    View    GoTo

                              Item            Function
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.
                         View          Views the waypoint on the
                                       map.






                                                                                             106]]></page><page Index="116"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 107  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                             (2) Select any letters on  the  “Add  Track”
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-   screen.
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.
                                                                             Add Track
                                      Map Settings
                                                                               A    B
                              Waypoints
                                                                          A    B    C
                              Tracks
                                                                          B    C    D
                              Satellite Status
                              Depth / Position
                                                                 Cancel                    Save
                             Close
                                                              (3) Tap “Save”.

                        Tracks                                Tap “>”  to display  the track management
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to  screen.
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                                          Track Manager
                                      Track Manager                     <Current>     EDIT
                              DOK
                                                                       Distance:    0.00  ft
                              <Current>


                                                                 Close            Show
                             Close                Record Track
                                                                   Item            Function
                              Item            Function                       Changes the color of the
                         Record Track /   Records the current path           track.
                         Stop Recording  (track) being driven, or
                                       halts the recording of the
                                       track.                 EDIT           Changes the name of, or
                                                                             deletes, the track.
                         Save          When the recording stops,
                                       a Save Track prompt will   Show / Hide  Shows the track on the
                                       appear. Choosing Save will            map. Hide will make that
                                       display the Add Track                 track invisible.
                                       screen shown below. Spin   Close      Returns to the Track Man-
                                       the dials to choose a three-          ager screen.
                                       letter name and touch
                                       Save when complete.

                        To change a track name:
                        (1) Tap Track Name.



                        107]]></page><page Index="117"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 108  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Satellite status                      To perform settings, select the item you want
                        Display detectable satellites.        to display.

                               Satellite Status  N
                            SATELLITES     3
                            9:47
                            Latitude:  35.6060
                            Longitude:  -84.2541
                            Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                            HDOP:  0.00
                            VDOP:  0.00
                            TDOP:  0.00
                            SOG:  0.0
                            COG:  0
                                               S
                            Close
                        Depth / Position
                        Perform  settings  for contour lines and  safe
                        depths.

                                      Depth / Position

                            DEPTH CONTOUR
                              All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            SAFETY CONTOUR
                              66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft


                            Close

                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.

                        Chart Setup
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on
                        the map.

                                       Chart Setup


                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES

                            Close



                                                                                             108]]></page><page Index="118"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 109  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                   Trip screen                    Name             Function
                        This screen displays the hours of engine op-  Water Tempera-  Shows the ambient water
                        eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-  ture*  temperature in degrees
                                                                            Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                        tion.                                               sius.
                                        1            2 3      Average Speed  Shows the average boat
                                                                            speed in miles per hour or
                                 NW       N       NE                        kilometers per hour.
                                Economy :    0.0 MPG          Highest Speed  Shows the highest speed of
                                                                            the boat in miles per hour or
                              Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi                        kilometers per hour.
                                                              Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                                Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                                                              Hours*        hours that the port engine
                                                                            has been running since the
                                Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                                                                            boat was new.
                                                              Starboard En-  Shows the total number of
                                                    Reset All
                                                              gine Hours*   hours that the starboard en-
                                                                            gine has been running since
                        1  Menu
                                                                            the boat was new.
                        2  Scrollbar
                        3  “Reset All” button                 * This item cannot be reset.
                        The menu displays the following items. Scroll  To reset an item on the trip screen:
                        through the menu items using the scrollbar.  Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                             Name            Function         you want to reset for several seconds.
                         Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                       tance that can be traveled   To reset all of the display items:
                                       on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                       fuel. When gallons are se-  Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                                       lected for the display units,   items.
                                       the value is shown in miles
                                       and when liters are selected
                                       for the display units, the
                                       value is shown in kilome-
                                       ters.
                         Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                       eled by the boat in miles or
                                       kilometers since the item
                                       was last reset.
                         Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                       has been consumed by the
                                       port and starboard engines
                                       in gallons or liters.
                         Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                       sumption of the port and
                                       starboard engines in gal-
                                       lons per hour or liters per
                                       hour.





                        109]]></page><page Index="119"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 110  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                              Drive control screen            (8) Tap the up or down button to set the
                        This screen can be used to set a target speed  amount of water for each bag.
                        for the boat, increase the set speed.  (9) Wait a few minutes until the ballast level
                                                                 reaches the desired level.
                              WKS  WKB                        (10) Tap the “Back” button.
                                                              (11) After setting the preceding items, tap the
                              Target Speed   21.0
                                                                 “Set” button.
                              Acceleration   Fast
                                                                   WKS  WKB
                                                                    Target Speed  21.0

                                                                   Acceleration    Fast
                            Set                       Save

                        To activate the drive control:
                        (1) Tap the tab you want to set.
                        (2) Tap the target speed.                 Set                      Save
                        (3) To set  the speed,  tap each digit and
                            scroll up or down, and  then tap the  (12) Move the remote control levers to the ful-
                            “Back” button.                       ly.

                                                              TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are  moved
                                                               slowly to the fully open position, the boat
                                                               may not accelerate according to the select-
                                    8         0                ed acceleration profile or reach the set tar-
                                                               get speed.
                                    9         1                If the single lever mode is activated, move
                                                               only the remote control lever for the port
                                                               engine to the fully open position. (See page
                                                               104  for information on the single lever
                        (4) Tap the desired acceleration profile.
                                                               mode button.)
                        (5) Tap the “Set” button, and then tap the
                                                               212SD / 212XD: While the DRiVE mode is
                            “Save” button.
                                                               activated, the drive control mode cannot
                        (6) Select the characters  you want to  set,
                                                               be used.
                            tap the “Save” button.
                        TIP:
                                                              To deactivate the drive control:
                        Steps (7) to (10) are set only for models with
                                                              (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                        ballast.
                                                                 neutral position.
                                                              (2) Tap the “CANCEL” button.
                        (7) Tap the ballast bag level.

                                                                                             110]]></page><page Index="120"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 111  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Media screen                currently connected device, and  then  con-
                        This screen can be used to receive a radio  nect the other device.
                        broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                        ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-  To change the volume:
                        form other functions.                 The following slider is displayed in each
                                                              screen.
                                                              Use the slider control to change the volume.
                                        Source
                                                                               1
                                  AM Radio    FM Radio
                                  Weather     Bluetooth
                                        Auxiliary             1  Slider control

                                                              TIP:
                           Turn Off   Select a Source  Zone Control
                                                              The volume can also be adjusted by tapping
                                                              the  “   ”  or  “  ”  button.
                              Item            Function
                         AM Radio      Switches the source to the
                                       AM radio tuner and dis-  Radio screen (AM/FM)
                                       plays the AM radio screen.  You can receive a radio broadcast.
                         FM Radio      Switches the source to the
                                       FM radio tuner and dis-
                                       plays the FM radio screen.      AM Radio       AM-1
                         Weather       Switches the source to the   1  1710  2  3  4    5
                                       weather radio tuner and
                                       displays the weather radio              P1
                                       screen.
                                                                            1710 kHz
                         Bluetooth     Switches the source to an
                                       external device connected
                                       using Bluetooth wireless
                                       technology, and displays
                                       the Bluetooth screen.     Source           MPH    Zone Control
                         Auxiliary     Switches the source to the
                                       auxiliary device and dis-   Item            Function
                                       plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                                             Decreases the radio sta-
                         Turn Off      Turns the audio system on             tion frequency. Touch and
                                       or off.                               hold this button to auto-
                         Zone Control  Displays the volume ad-               matically seek the next
                                       justment screen for each              available radio station.
                                       zone.                                 Decreases the radio sta-
                                                                             tion frequency.
                        TIP:
                        If multiple external devices are connected at        Increases the radio station
                        the same time, the audio system may not op-          frequency.
                        erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                        ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                        111]]></page><page Index="121"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 112  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                              Item            Function        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-
                                       Increases the radio station   ton.
                                       frequency. Touch and hold
                                       this button to automatically
                                       seek the next available ra-  Bluetooth screen
                                       dio station.           Smartphones and other external devices that
                         Source        Displays the media screen.  are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                                                              nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-
                        To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                        Tap “   ” or “   ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              through the audio system’s speakers.
                        frequency.
                        To save a radio station frequency to a preset  Bluetooth
                        button:
                                                                           Best Of You
                        Tune the radio to the desired radio station,       Foo Fighters
                                                                           In Your Honor
                        and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        button for several seconds.
                                         1
                                  AM Radio      AM-1             Source           MPH    Zone Control
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                   Item            Function
                                          P1
                                                                             Displays the external de-
                                      1710 kHz                               vice management screen.
                                                                             Displays information about
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control              the current audio track.
                        1  Preset button
                                                              To connect an external device:
                        Weather screen                        (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                        You can receive a weather broadcast.     “+Add Device”.
                                                              (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                                                 ternal  device, and  then search for the
                                   NOAA National Weather
                                                                 multi-function display unit of the boat.
                                                              TIP:
                                   CH 1 -0.000  kHz           Make sure that other external devices have
                                                              their Bluetooth function disabled before be-
                             1   2   3    4   5   6   7
                                                              ginning the pairing  process  to reduce  con-
                                                              nection issues.
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control
                                                              (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                                                                 firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                                                                 played.


                                                                                             112]]></page><page Index="122"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 113  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function  Zone control screen
                            display unit and the external device.  Perform volume adjustment for each zone.

                        To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                                                                            Zone Control
                        Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        Auxiliary screen
                        Portable media players  and other external
                        devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                        tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                        devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                                                 Back     Selected Zone: Interior
                        ers.
                                                              To adjust the volume:
                                       Auxiliary              (1) Tap the highlighted part.
                                                              (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                                                                 left or right.
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Zones that can be set differ depending on the
                                                              specifications.
                           Source           MPH    Zone Control


                                                         1


                                                12V



                                                BILGE
                                                     HORN


                        1  Auxiliary input jack

                        TIP:
                         You can adjust the volume level of the
                          speakers using  the multi-function  display
                          unit or the volume control of the external
                          device.
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external
                          device.


                        113]]></page><page Index="123"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 114  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                             System control screen                     Setting screen
                        The system control screen can be used to  The setting screen can be used to change the
                        turn the boat lights on and off.      settings of the multi-function display unit.
                        When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                        on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                                                                              Menu
                        screen.
                                                                       Time         Depth
                                                                       Unit        Brightness
                                                                      Wellness     Language
                                                                            Tuner Region




                                                                   Item            Function
                             Courtesy  Dock
                                                              Time           Displays the time setting
                                                                             screen.
                              Item            Function        Depth          Displays the depth alarm
                                                                             setting screen.
                         Courtesy      Turns the courtesy lights
                                       on or off. (See page 30 for   Unit    Displays the unit setting
                                       information on the location           screen.
                                       of the courtesy lights.)  Brightness  Displays the brightness
                         Docking       Turns the docking lights on           setting screen.
                                       or off.                Wellness       Displays the maintenance
                                                                             setting screen.
                        To adjust the brightness of the lights:  Language    Displays the language set-
                        Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-          ting screen.
                        ness for, and move the slider control left or  Tuner Region  Displays the tuner region
                        right to adjust.                                     setting screen.
                                         1
                                                              Time setting screen
                                                              Perform settings related to the time.

                        1  Slider control                                     Time

                        TIP:                                         12-Hour:    24-Hour:
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                                     GMT Offset:    -4
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.
                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled

                                                                 Back




                                                                                             114]]></page><page Index="124"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 115  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        To set the time:                      Unit setting screen
                        (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-  The display units for the multi-function dis-
                            play.                             play unit can be changed.
                        (2) Tap “   ” or “   to adjust GMT off-
                            set.
                                                                             Set Unit
                        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                            ing time.                                        U.S. Std

                        Depth alarm setting screen                    U.S. Std       Metric
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                        set.
                                                                 Back
                                      Set Depth Alarm
                                                              Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.

                                         5.0 Ft
                                                              Brightness setting screen
                                                              The multi-function display has a day mode
                                                              and a night mode.
                                                              The brightness can be set separately for the
                            Back
                                                              day mode and for the night mode.
                                          1
                        1  Slider control
                                                                           Set Brightness
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                                                                       Night:    30  Day:    90
                        (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                        TIP:
                         The water depth can also be adjusted by
                          tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.
                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                                                                 Back
                          depth alarm will not operate.
                                                              To set the brightness:
                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.
                                                              (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                                                                 just.
                                                                               1




                                                              1  Slider control




                        115]]></page><page Index="125"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 116  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                        TIP:                                  Language setting screen
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-  The language for the  multi-function  display
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.      unit can be changed.


                        (3) Tap “Back”.                                    Set Language
                        Maintenance setting screen
                                                                       English     Espanol
                        This screen displays the number of hours that
                        the engines have been running since the last         Francais
                        maintenance.


                                 Time Since Last Maintenance     Back
                             Port Engine          0  Hrs
                                                              To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                                                              guage.
                              Starboard Engine    0  Hrs
                                                              Tuner Region setting screen
                                                              Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                            Back                     Reset    play unit will be used.

                        After maintenance is  performed, reset the
                                                                            Tuner Region
                        number of hours of operation as follows.
                                                                     North America  South America
                        To reset the number of hours of operation:
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-          Japan        Taiwan
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.        Back
                        TIP:
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen  To change the tuner region, tap the desired
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap  region.
                        the “NO” button.















                                                                                             116]]></page><page Index="126"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 117  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the display.


                                                                                RUNNING MODEE
                                                                                RUNNIN G  M O D
                                                     SESE   S S    S SWW
                           FUELL E                                                          DEPTH
                           FU
                                                                                            D D DEPTH
                           100
                           100 % % %                                                        .8 9.8 ft ft 8 9 9 9
                           100
                           100%
                                                    Check Engine !
                               19 19                Stop the BCU.         NEXT           19 19
                                                                              x1000 rp
                                        x1000 rpm                             x1000 rpmm
                                        x1000 rpm
                                                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                          QUIT
                                                           MPH
                                                           MPH
                              S STARTT                                                  HOUSEOUSE
                               TAR
                                                                                        H
                               3.
                              1 13.0 0  V V  9 9                                   9 9  13.00  V V
                                                                                        13.
                                          B
                                                                      N
                                          Bilgeilge  Blowe            Nav v  Ancho
                                                                           Anchorr
                                                                       a
                                               Blowerr
                             Name                               Function
                                       Displays the next active warning. When there is only 1 warning, the displayed
                         NEXT
                                       warning will not change.
                         QUIT          Closes the displayed warning.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                            1
                                                                                       M
                                                                                     G
                                                                                         D
                                                                                       O
                                                                                RUNNIN
                                                                                RUNNING MODEE
                                                     SESE   S S    SWSW
                           FUELL
                           FU E                                                             D D DEPTH
                                                                                            DEPTH
                           100
                           100 % % %                                                        .8 9.8 ft ft 8 9 9 9
                           100
                           100%
                                                    Check Engine !
                               19 19                Stop the BCU.         NEXT           19 19
                                                                              1000
                                                                                rp
                                         1000
                                           rpm
                                        x1000 rpm                             x x1000 rpmm
                                        x
                                                    Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                          QUIT
                                                           MPH
                                                           MPH
                               TAR
                                                                                        HOUSEE
                              STARTT                                                    HOUS
                              S
                               3.
                                                                                        13.
                              1 13.0 0  V V  9 9                                   9 9  13.00  V V
                                                                           Anchorr
                                                                      Nav
                                          B
                                               Blowe
                                          Bilgeilge  Blowerr          N a v  Ancho
                                                            2
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        117]]></page><page Index="127"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 118  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine
                                                           Stop Port Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                         Check Engine
                                                           Stop Starboard Engine.
                         Low Oil Pressure
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Over Temperature
                                                           Stop the BCU.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                           Stop Steering.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                         Check Engine                      Stop Steering.
                                                           Open service valve of pump. Move cylinder to center
                                                           position. Using the two remote control levers, per-
                                                           form the boat steering operation by the engine
                                                           speed difference.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                           Low Voltage.
                         House Battery                     Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                           High Voltage.
                                                           Low Voltage.
                         Start Battery                     Start engine to recharge the battery.
                                                           High Voltage.
                         Fuel                              Low Fuel Level.
                         Depth                             Low Depth Level.
                                                           Port Engine.
                                                           Check Engine CAN.
                                                           Starboard Engine.
                                                           Check Engine CAN.
                                                           SPU25-15.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           Depth Transducer.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           Joystick.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                         Communication Error
                                                           SPU25-15, Joystick, Stereo and Depth Transducer.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           BCU.
                                                           Check Engine CAN.
                                                           No communication with the port engine, the star-
                                                           board engine and the BCU.
                                                           Stereo.
                                                           Check Auxiliary CAN.
                                                           GPS.
                                                           Check NMEA0183 connection.


                                                                                             118]]></page><page Index="128"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 119  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  ularly while applying throttle. If you do not see
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  any water at the outlets, cooling water may
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  not be circulating in the engines.
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning                                           2
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-                  1
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  TIP:
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        oil level. (See page 166 for engine oil level
                        checking procedures.)                 If water is not circulating, something may be
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  pump clean-out procedure” on page 214.
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the
                        engine.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                                                                        1
                        the engine is over heating, “Over Tempera-
                        ture” will be displayed. At the same time, the
                        engine speed is automatically limited to help
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        prevent damage. If this occurs, immediately
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore or
                        maneuver to a safe location, and check for
                        water discharge at the cooling water pilot
                        outlets. Check that water comes out of the
                        outlets while the engines are running, partic-



                        119]]></page><page Index="129"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 120  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               tank as soon as possible. (See page 150 for
                                                              information on filling the fuel tank.)
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  Depth warning
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        you return to shore.                  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        overheating engine and use the properly  buzzer will sound.
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  set for the depth alarm. (See page 115 for in-
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        page 99 for  information on the no-wake
                        mode.
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        226.

                        Low/High voltage warning
                        If either “Start Battery” or “House Battery” ap-
                        pears on the multi-function  display and the
                        buzzer will sound, check the battery connec-
                        tions. If the battery connections are clean and
                        tight and the warning indication continues,
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the charg-
                        ing system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.

                        Low fuel level warning
                        If “Fuel”  appears  on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound, refill the fuel


                                                                                             120]]></page><page Index="130"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 121  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                       Seats

                             WARNING                                                       1
                        Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                        ed  seating area, place feet on  the  deck,
                        and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                        straps when the boat is in motion.

                        This  boat  is equipped with the following
                        seats.

                            1    2 3          4  5    1       1  Bow filler cushion

                                                              These cushions can also be used to create a
                                                              temporary center seat.








                        1  Handrail                                                          1
                        2  Front port seat (rear)
                        3  Front port seat (front)
                        4  Front starboard seat (front)
                        5  Front starboard seat (rear)
                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                        Two bow filler cushions are provided for use
                        while the boat is not being operated.
                        These cushions can be used to make a large
                        flat area in the bow for use as a sundeck.
                             WARNING
                         Do not use the bow filler cushions while
                          the boat is underway.  A passenger
                          could lose balance and fall on the deck
                          or overboard, causing injury or death.
                         Stow the cushions securely before oper-
                          ating the boat. A loose cushion could be
                          blown by the wind, distracting the oper-
                          ator or striking a passenger, which
                          could result in an accident.




                        121]]></page><page Index="131"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 122  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        AR210 / SX210                         Driver’s seat (AR210 / SX210)
                           3 7 4    7         3   5           The driver’s seat can slide forward and rear-
                                                     6        ward, and the seat can swivel. In addition, the
                                                              seat bolster at the front of the seat can be
                                                        3
                                                              flipped up to change the seat style for a
                                                              raised seating position.
                                                              Make sure that the seat is securely locked in
                                                              place before getting underway.
                                                              To slide the seat:
                          2                                   (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.
                             1
                        1  Driver’s seat
                        2  Rear starboard seat
                        3  Handgrip
                        4  Rear center seat
                        5  Rear port seat
                        6  Passenger’s seat
                        7  Strap

                        Except for AR210 / SX210
                                                                     1
                           3 5 6    5         3   7
                                                     2        1  Slide/swivel lock lever
                                                        3
                                                              (2) Rotate the lever to port (left).





                          4
                             1
                        1  Driver’s seat
                        2  Passenger’s seat
                        3  Handgrip
                        4  Rear starboard seat
                        5  Strap
                                                              (3) Move  the seat to  the desired  position,
                        6  Rear center seat
                                                                 and then release the lever.
                        7  Rear port seat
                                                              (4) Push the lever to its original position.








                                                                                             122]]></page><page Index="132"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 123  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To swivel the seat:                   To flip up the seat bolster:
                        (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.  Lift up the seat bolster at the front of the seat
                        (2) Rotate the lever to starboard (right).  so that it is resting against the backrest.












                                                                        1

                        (3) Swivel the seat to the desired position. If  1  Seat bolster
                            it is too easy or too difficult to rotate the
                            seat, adjust the swivel friction by turning  Driver’s seat
                            the swivel friction knob in or out.  (except for AR210 / SX210)
                                                              The driver’s seat can slide forward and rear-
                                                              ward, and the seat can swivel, and the back-
                                                              rest angle can be adjusted. In addition, the
                                                              seat bolster at the front of the seat can be
                                                              flipped up to change the seat style for a
                                                              raised seating position.
                                                              Make sure that the seat is securely locked in
                                                              place before getting underway.
                                                              To slide the seat:
                           1                                  (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.
                        1  Swivel friction knob

                        (4) Push the lever to its original position.







                                                                     1

                                                              1  Slide/swivel lock lever






                        123]]></page><page Index="133"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 124  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (2) Rotate the lever to port (left).  (3) Swivel the seat to the desired position. If
                                                                 it is too easy or too difficult to rotate the
                                                                 seat, adjust the swivel friction by turning
                                                                 the swivel friction knob in or out.










                        (3) Move  the seat to  the desired  position,
                            and then release the lever.          1
                        (4) Push the lever to its original position.
                        To swivel the seat:                   1  Swivel friction knob
                        (1) Extend the slide/swivel lock lever.
                        (2) Rotate the lever to starboard (right).  (4) Push the lever to its original position.
                                                              To flip up the seat bolster (driver’s seat only):
                                                              Lift up the seat bolster at the front of the seat
                                                              so that it is resting against the backrest.












                                                                         1

                                                              1  Seat bolster

















                                                                                             124]]></page><page Index="134"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 125  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To use the armrests:                  Passenger’s seat
                        Lower the armrests until they stop.   (except for AR210 / SX210)
                                                              The passenger’s seat can be adjusted in the
                                                              same ways as the driver’s seat.
                                                              See “Driver’s seat” for instructions on adjust-
                                                              ing the seat. However, the seat bolster of the
                                                          1   passenger’s seat cannot be adjusted.




                                                                       1


                        1  Armrest
                        To adjust the backrest angle:
                        While lifting the adjusting lever on the star-
                        board side of the seat, move the backrest to
                        the desired position.                 1  Passenger’s seat






                                                       1





                                2
                        1  Backrest
                        2  Adjusting lever


















                        125]]></page><page Index="135"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 126  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Engine hood                    Storage compartments
                        The engine hood can be opened to access  This boat is equipped with the following con-
                        the engines.                          venient on-board storage compartments.
                        The engine hood latch is located under the  Make sure  that the storage  compartments
                        front of the rear center seat.        are securely closed before getting underway.
                        To prevent excess water from spilling onto
                        the engines after a rainfall or washing down  Anchor storage compartment
                        the boat, wipe off the seat cushions before  The anchor storage compartment is located
                        opening the engine hood.              at the bow.
                        To open the engine hood, pull the engine  To open the anchor storage compartment:
                        hood latch up and lift the engine hood.  Pull the anchor storage compartment lid latch
                                                              to open the lid.

                                                                                              1
                                              2



                                                                      2
                            1



                        1  Engine hood
                        2  Engine hood latch                  1  Anchor storage compartment lid
                                                              2  Anchor storage compartment lid latch
                        To close the engine hood, push the front of
                        the rear center seat to securely lock it in
                        place.






                                                                                              1


                                                              1  Anchor storage compartment

                                                              When storing the anchor, place some cush-
                                                              ioning material or the anchor line under the
                                                              anchor.





                                                                                             126]]></page><page Index="136"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 127  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To close the anchor storage compartment:  Ski locker
                        Close the  anchor  storage compartment lid,  NOTICE
                        and then push it to securely lock it in place.
                                                              212XE / 212XD: This storage compartment
                        Front underseat storage               contains a ballast bag. Be careful not to
                        compartments                          store  items in this area that  could be
                        The front underseat storage compartment  crushed or damaged by the ballast bag as
                        (starboard) and front underseat storage com-  it fills.
                        partment (port) are located  under  the front
                                                              The ski locker is located under the floor.
                        starboard seat and front port seat respective-
                                                              To open the ski locker:
                        ly.
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle up.
                        To open a front underseat storage compart-
                                                              (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                        ment, lift the front seat (rear) up.
                                                                 open the ski locker lid.

                               1
                                                               2



                                                                                     1



                        1  Front starboard seat (rear)
                                                              1  Lock handle
                                                              2  Ski locker lid



                               1
                                                                                            1









                        1  Front under storage compartment
                                                              1  Ski locker
                        To close a front underseat storage compart-
                        ment, lower the front seat (rear).





                        127]]></page><page Index="137"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 128  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To close the ski locker:              Rear underseat storage compartment
                        (1) Close the ski locker lid.         (starboard)
                        (2) Turn the lock  handle counterclockwise  The rear underseat  storage compartment
                            and make  sure that  the lid is  securely  (starboard) is located  under  the rear star-
                            closed.                           board seat.
                        (3) Push the lock handle down.        To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                        To drain water from the ski locker:   ment (starboard), unsnap the retaining strap,
                        (1) Remove the drain plug on the bottom of  and then lift the rear starboard seat up.
                            the ski locker to drain the water.










                                             1
                                                                                  2   1
                                                              1  Rear starboard seat
                        1  Drain plug                         2  Retaining strap

                        (2) Securely install the drain plug in its origi-
                            nal position.
                                                                                1










                                                              1  Rear underseat storage compartment (star-
                                                                board)
                                                              To close the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              ment (starboard), lower the rear starboard
                                                              seat, and then snap the retaining strap.









                                                                                             128]]></page><page Index="138"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 129  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        Rear underseat storage compartment    To close the rear underseat storage compart-
                        (port)                                ment (port), lower the rear port seat, and then
                                                              snap the retaining strap.
                             WARNING
                        Do not carry any flammable substances in  Enclosed storage compartment
                        the storage compartment or any heavy or  The enclosed storage compartment is a large
                        metal items that can damage the battery  storage compartment that is located on the
                        or cause a short circuit. Sparks or fire  port side.
                        could result.                         There is a cooler box in the enclosed storage
                                                              compartment.
                        The rear underseat storage compartment
                                                              To open the enclosed storage compartment:
                        (port) is located under the rear port seat.
                                                              Pull the enclosed storage compartment door
                        To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                              latch to open the door.
                        ment (port), unsnap the retaining strap, and
                        then lift the rear port seat up.
                                                                1








                                                                                      2
                                                              1  Enclosed storage compartment door latch
                                  1
                                      2                       2  Enclosed storage compartment door
                        1  Rear port seat
                        2  Retaining strap




                                        1




                                                                                      1

                                                              1  Enclosed storage compartment


                        1  Rear underseat storage compartment (port)




                        129]]></page><page Index="139"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 130  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To close the enclosed storage compartment:  partment  door, and then hook the latch to
                        Close  the enclosed storage compartment  securely lock it in place.
                        door, and then push it to securely lock it in  To use the driver’s side console compart-
                        place.                                ment door as the partition:
                                                              (1) Unfold the door and guide the edge of it
                        Driver’s side console compartment        into the channel on the enclosed storage
                        The driver’s side console compartment is lo-  compartment.
                        cated in front of the helm.
                        The driver’s side console compartment door                           1
                        can be used as a partition in the front walk-
                        through.
                        To open the driver’s side console compart-                           2
                        ment, unhook the driver’s side console com-
                        partment door latch.




                                                              1  Edge
                                                  1           2  Channel

                                                              (2) To hold the door in place, hook the driv-
                                                  2              er’s side console compartment door
                                                                 latch to the metal tab on the front side of
                                                                 the door.
                        1  Driver’s side console compartment door
                        2  Driver’s side console compartment door latch


                                                                                             2



                                                  1
                                                                   1

                                                              1  Driver’s side console compartment door latch
                                                              2  Metal tab


                        1  Driver’s side console compartment
                        To close the driver’s side console compart-
                        ment, close the driver’s side console com-


                                                                                             130]]></page><page Index="140"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 131  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        Stowable table                        Glove compartment (AR210 / SX210)
                        (except for AR210 / SX210)            The glove compartment is located in the port
                        The stowable table is located in front of the  console.
                        passenger’s seat.                     To open the glove compartment:
                        To use the stowable table, pull the table and  Insert your finger into the glove compartment
                        lower it until it contacts the stoppers.  lid hole and open the glove compartment lid.


                                                                         2           1

                                                    1








                        1  Stowable table                     1  Glove compartment lid hole
                                                              2  Glove compartment lid
                                                       2      To close the glove compartment:
                                                              Close the glove compartment lid.
                               1

                                                         1    Glove compartment
                                                              (except for AR210 / SX210)
                                                              The glove compartment is located in front of
                                                              the passenger’s seat.
                                                              To open the glove compartment:
                                                              While pulling the glove compartment latch,
                                                              pull the glove compartment lid to open it.
                        1  Stowable table
                        2  Stopper
                                                                                              1
                          Maximum weight limit:
                            9 kg (20 lb)

                        To stow the stowable table, lift the table and
                        place it in its original position.                              2




                                                              1  Glove compartment latch
                                                              2  Glove compartment lid


                        131]]></page><page Index="141"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 132  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation


                                                                1






                                                    1                     2





                        1  Glove compartment                  1  Rear platform hatch
                                                              2  Lock handle
                        To close the glove compartment:
                        Close the glove compartment lid, and  then
                        push it to securely lock it in place.
                        To lock the glove compartment:
                        (1) Close the glove compartment.
                        (2) Insert the glove compartment key into
                            the glove compartment latch, and then                             1
                            turn the key counterclockwise.
                        TIP:
                        Store the glove compartment key so that it is
                        not lost.
                        To unlock the glove compartment:      1  Wet storage compartment
                        Insert the glove compartment  key into the
                        glove compartment latch, and then turn the  To close the wet storage compartment:
                        key clockwise.                        (1) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              (2) Turn the  lock handle  counterclockwise
                        Wet storage compartment                  and make sure that the hatch is securely
                        The wet storage compartment is located un-  closed.
                        der the swim platform.                (3) Push the lock handles down.
                        To open the wet storage compartment:  TIP:
                        (1) Pull the lock handle up.          The engines will not start if the rear platform
                        (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then  hatch is not securely closed.
                            open the rear platform hatch.











                                                                                             132]]></page><page Index="142"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 133  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                  Walk-through                           Windshield
                        Front walk-through                    The windshield can be opened and closed.
                        This boat has a large bow  area where two
                                                                  WARNING
                        adults can sit comfortably with their legs out-
                        stretched. The front walk-through provides  To avoid injury, the windshield must be se-
                        easy access to the bow area from the cabin  cured when the boat is in motion.
                        area.
                                                              To close the windshield:
                                                              (1) Unsnap the  retaining strap from  the
                                                                 windshield, and then snap it onto  the
                                                                 strap base.



                                                                                             2
                                      1



                        1  Front walk-through                                          1
                        Rear walk-through
                        The backrest of the rear center seat is low in
                                                              1  Retaining strap
                        order to  make boarding  the boat from the
                                                              2  Strap base
                        rear easier.
                                                              (2) Close the windshield, and then turn the
                                                1                windshield latches to the lock position.




                                                                              1


                                                2


                        1  Rear walk-through
                        2  Center seat cushion
                                                              1  Windshield latch
                        TIP:
                        In order to board or disembark from the boat,
                        the center seat cushion can be removed.





                        133]]></page><page Index="143"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 134  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To open the windshield:                                     1
                        (1) Turn the windshield latches to the unlock
                            position, and then open the windshield.
                        (2) Unsnap the retaining strap from the strap
                            base, and  then snap it onto the wind-
                            shield.

                        Folding mirror (212XE / 212XD)
                        The mirror is installed on the driver’s side of
                        the windshield.
                                                              1  Lower lock knob
                                                     1











                        1  Folding mirror
                        To adjust the mirror angle:
                        Pull on the upper lock knob, adjust the angle
                        of the mirror, and then release the knob.
                             1













                        1  Upper lock knob
                        To fold the mirror:
                        Pull on the lower lock knob on the side, fold
                        the mirror, and then release the knob.




                                                                                             134]]></page><page Index="144"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 135  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                                   Anchor light                  Anchor light (SX210 / 212)
                             (except for SX210 / 212)         The boat is equipped with a removable an-
                                                              chor light.
                         NOTICE
                                                              The anchor light is stored in the ski locker. It
                        Do not attach a ski rope or other tow-rope  is also the “all-around” light for navigation at
                        to the anchor light. Otherwise, the anchor  night or in low-visibility conditions. (See page
                        light could be damaged.               66, 86 for information on the anchor light on.)
                                                              To set up the anchor light:
                        The anchor light is located at the top center of
                                                              (1) Open the ski locker. (See page 127.)
                        the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-
                        around” light for navigation at night or in low-
                        visibility conditions. (See page 66, 86 for in-
                        formation on the anchor light on.)                                  1

                                                         1







                                                              1  Ski locker
                                                              (2) Remove the anchor light from the anchor
                                                                 light holder.
                        1  Anchor light



                                                                   1                      2









                                                              1  Anchor light holder
                                                              2  Anchor light











                        135]]></page><page Index="145"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 136  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (3) Open the cap of the anchor light socket,     Bow ladder
                            fit the protrusion on the anchor light into  The bow ladder is located in the anchor stor-
                            the slot in the socket, and then install the  age compartment.
                            light into the socket.
                                                                                   1
                                                                                       2
                                                         3
                                                                                           3


                                                                                              4

                          1                             2
                                                              1  Bow ladder
                        1  Cap                                2  Retaining strap
                        2  Slot                               3  Bow ladder strap
                        3  Protrusion                         4  Anchor storage compartment
                        (4) Fit the anchor light stopper into the an-  To use the bow ladder:
                            chor light socket.                (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                                                                 lid. (See page 126.)
                                                              (2) Unsnap the retaining strap from the an-
                                                         1       chor storage compartment.
                                                              (3) Unhook the bow ladder strap.
                                                              (4) Extend the bow ladder out completely,
                                                                 and then lower it.
                                                              (5) Close the anchor storage compartment
                                                                 lid to use it as a step.



                        1  Anchor light stopper
                        To store the anchor light:                                         1
                        (1) Pull the anchor light stopper upward, re-
                            move the anchor light, and then close the
                            cap of the anchor light socket.
                        (2) Install  the  anchor light into the  anchor
                            light holder, and then close the ski lock-
                            er.
                                                              1  Bow ladder





                                                                                             136]]></page><page Index="146"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 137  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To stow the bow ladder:                        Swim platform
                        (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                                                                  WARNING
                            lid.
                        (2) Raise the bow ladder, and then pull it  Stay away  from the  swim platform area
                            rearward completely.              while the  engines are  running. Exhaust
                        (3) Hook the bow ladder strap onto the bow  gases coming from underneath it contain
                            ladder.                           carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless
                        (4) Fold the bow ladder, and then store it in  gas which may cause  brain  damage or
                            the anchor storage compartment.   death when inhaled. Symptoms include
                        (5) Snap the retaining strap onto the strap  nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.
                            base to secure the bow ladder.
                                                              The swim platform area provides a place to
                        (6) Close the anchor storage compartment
                                                              stand or sit while putting on skis or a wake-
                            lid.
                                                              board, and includes a stern ladder to make
                                                              boarding from the water easier.




                                                               1









                                                              1  Swim platform
                                                              Stern ladder
                                                              The stern ladder is stored under the swim
                                                              platform.
                                                              To use the stern ladder:
                                                              (1) Lift the end of the stern ladder to release
                                                                 it from the hooks on the boat.















                        137]]></page><page Index="147"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 138  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              Remote control keypad
                                                              (except for AR210 / SX210)
                                                              The remote control keypad is located on the
                                                              port side of the swim platform.
                                                              For operating instructions, refer to the stereo
                                                              system owner’s manual included with your
                                                              boat.
                                               1
                                                               1


                        1  Stern ladder

                        (2) Pull the stern ladder out completely, and
                            then lower it.




                                                              1  Remote control keypad

                                                              Side table
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              If the side table is installed at the swim
                                                              platform, do not use the table while the en-
                                                              gines are running. Exhaust gases coming
                        To stow the stern ladder:
                                                              from underneath the swim platform con-
                        (1) Raise the stern ladder until it is horizon-
                                                              tain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odor-
                            tal, and then push it forward completely.
                                                              less gas which may cause brain damage
                        (2) Push the end of the stern ladder to fit it
                                                              or death when inhaled. Symptoms include
                            onto the hooks on the boat.
                                                              nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              If the side table is installed at the swim
                                                              platform, remove the side table before op-
                                                              erating the boat. Otherwise, the side table
                                                              may fall into the water.


                                       1

                        1  Hook



                                                                                             138]]></page><page Index="148"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 139  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        The side table can be installed at the swim
                        platform or in front of the rear port seat.






                           1
                                                               3
                                                                                       2
                                                                              1
                                                              1  Table bracket
                                                              2  Table pole
                        1  Side table                         3  Table bracket knob
                                                              To remove the side table, pull the table brack-
                                                              et knob, and then pull the table pole upward.








                                                    1


                        1  Side table

                        To install the side table, slide the end of the
                        table pole into  the table bracket until it is
                        locked in place.




















                        139]]></page><page Index="149"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 140  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                Wakeboard tower               NOTICE
                             (except for SX210 / 212)
                                                              Do not modify the wakeboard tower to tow
                        The wakeboard tower is provided as an ele-
                                                              from it or to carry accessories not de-
                        vated tow point suitable for wakeboards and
                                                              signed for it. The wakeboard tower could
                        similar towable recreational equipment. The
                                                              be damaged. Also, the wakeboard tower
                        tow pylon can be used to attach a standard
                                                              collapsing feature is intended for storage
                        ski rope or other tow-rope.
                                                              only. The boat should not be transported
                                                              or  operated with  the tower in  the col-
                                                              lapsed position.
                                                              Collapsing and setting up the
                                                              wakeboard tower (AR210)
                                                              When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                                                              board tower.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                               Accidentally  dropping the wakeboard
                                                               tower while collapsing or raising it can
                             WARNING                           damage the tower, the boat, or both. An
                                                               assistant needs to help hold the wake-
                        Severe injury or death can result if you ig-
                                                               board tower in place during the proce-
                        nore any of the following:
                                                               dure.
                         Maximum towing capacity:
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                          1 Person, 158 kg (350 lb) max.
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                         Make sure the tow-rope is securely fas-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                          tened to  the  tow  pylon on the wake-
                                                               age.
                          board tower.
                         Do  not  tow a tube or other inflatable
                          from the wakeboard tower. Use the ski
                          tow hook on the transom.
                         Stay clear of the tow-rope while pulling
                          a wakeboard rider or skier.
                         Do not climb, hang, or sit on the wake-
                          board tower.
                         Make sure all knobs securing the wake-
                          board tower are tightened before opera-
                          tion and check periodically during use.








                                                                                             140]]></page><page Index="150"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 141  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        To collapse the wakeboard tower:      Collapsing and setting up the
                        (1) While an assistant supports the wake-  wakeboard tower (212S / 212SE /
                            board tower, completely loosen the lock  212SD / 212XE / 212XD)
                            knobs on both sides of the wakeboard  When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                            tower.                            board tower.
                                                              NOTICE
                                    1
                                                               Accidentally dropping the  upper tower
                                                               section while collapsing or raising it can
                                                               damage the tower, the boat, or both. An
                              2                                assistant  needs to support  the upper
                                                               tower section during the procedure.
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                                                               age.
                        1  Wakeboard tower
                        2  Lock knob                          To collapse the wakeboard tower:
                                                              (1) While an assistant supports the wake-
                        (2) Lower the wakeboard tower until it
                                                                 board tower, remove the T-handle lock
                            stops.
                                                                 pin on both sides of the wakeboard tow-
                                                                 er by turning it 180° and pulling it out.
                                                                          1




                                                                      2






                        To set up the wakeboard tower:
                                                              1  Wakeboard tower
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.         2  T-handle lock pin
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-
                            board tower, tighten the lock knobs on
                            both sides of the wakeboard tower until
                            they stop.








                        141]]></page><page Index="151"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 142  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (2) Lower the wakeboard tower until it            Bimini top
                            stops.                                (except for SX210 / 212)
                                                              Setting up the bimini top
                                                              To set up the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Remove the storage cover, and then un-
                                                                 wrap the bimini top.

                                                                          1







                        To set up the wakeboard tower:
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-
                            board tower, insert the T-handle lock  1  Storage cover
                            pins into the tower with the white mark
                            on each pin facing up.            (2) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                        (3) Turn each T-handle lock pin 180° so that  bow, and then open the flap and pull out
                            the white mark on the pin is aligned with  the front support poles from the bimini
                            the “LOCK” arrow mark.               top.


                                                                                  1

                         2       1





                                                                                     2

                        1  White mark                         1  Front support pole
                        2  Arrow mark                         2  Flap












                                                                                             142]]></page><page Index="152"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 143  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Insert the front support poles  into the  (5) Push the snap button and extend each
                            mounting holes in the wakeboard tower.  rear support pole to the long position.

                                                2
                                                                    1
                                                                    2

                                                                    3
                           1
                                                                    4
                                                                    5



                        1  Mounting hole                      1  Rear support pole
                        2  Front support pole                 2  Snap button
                                                              3  Short position
                        (4) Pull the rear of the bimini top toward the  4  Middle position
                            stern, and then unhook the rear support  5  Long position
                            poles from the main pole.
                                                              (6) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                                 support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin.
                                              2                                         1



                                                                            2         3

                                        1

                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Main pole

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket













                        143]]></page><page Index="153"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 144  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (7) While pulling the main pole down, push  Storing the bimini top
                            the snap button and shorten each rear  To store the bimini top:
                            support pole to either the middle position  (1) While pulling the main pole down slightly,
                            for cruising or to the short position if you  push the snap button, and then extend
                            are using the wakeboard tower. Be sure  each rear support pole to the long posi-
                            the snap buttons click into place.   tion to loosen the bimini top.


                             1                                        1

                             2
                                                                      2
                             3
                             4                                        3




                        1  Rear support pole                  1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     2  Snap button
                        3  Middle position                    3  Long position
                        4  Snap button
                                                              (2) Remove each rear support pole from the
                         NOTICE                                  rear support pole mounting bracket by
                                                                 rotating the lock pin.
                         Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                          bimini top in the up position.                                1
                         Be careful not to push the snap button
                          and extend the pole too far. Otherwise,
                          the lower section of the pole could fall          2         3
                          into the water.






                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket










                                                                                             144]]></page><page Index="154"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 145  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Push the snap button and shorten each  (5) Remove the front support poles from the
                            rear support pole to the short position.  wakeboard tower, and  then  place the
                                                                 poles in the flap of the bimini top.

                                1
                                                                                     1

                                2

                                3




                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     1  Front support pole
                        3  Snap button
                                                              (6) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                         NOTICE                                  stern, wrap the bimini top around the
                                                                 main pole, and then install the storage
                        Be careful not to push the snap button and
                                                                 cover.
                        extend the pole too far.  Otherwise, the
                        lower section of the pole could fall into the
                        water.

                        (4) Hook the rear  support  poles onto the
                            main pole, and then pull the rear of the
                            bimini top toward the bow.




                                              2

                           1






                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Main pole








                        145]]></page><page Index="155"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 146  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Trailering with the bimini top            Bimini top (SX210 / 212)
                        The bimini top must be secured to the boat  Setting up the bimini top
                        when it is being trailered. When the boat is  To set up the bimini top:
                        trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,  (1) Raise the  bimini top,  and then unhook
                        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-  the rear  support poles from the main
                        lapsed position and install the storage cover.  pole.
                        If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                        cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        the tow pylon on the wakeboard tower to re-
                        strict movement.

                        Removing the bimini top                                  1
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                            mini top”.
                        (2) While supporting the bimini top, remove
                            the lock pins securing the main pole to
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                            the wakeboard tower, and then remove
                            the top.                          (2) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                                 support pole mounting bracket using the
                                    1                            lock pin. Make sure that the tab on the
                                                                 end of the lock pin is pointing downward.



                                                                 1


                            2
                                                                     2
                        1  Bimini top
                        2  Lock pin
                                                                                  3
                        Installing the bimini top
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                        To install the bimini top:
                                                              2  Rear support pole mounting bracket
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                                                              3  Lock pin
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                        the lock pins are securely installed.








                                                                                             146]]></page><page Index="156"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 147  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Remove the storage cover, unfold the bi-  (5) Tighten the front straps so that the top is
                            mini top, and pull it toward the bow.  snug and wrinkle free.



                                      1










                        1  Storage cover
                                                              NOTICE
                        (4) Hook the latch on each front strap onto  Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                            the strap eye.                    bimini top in the up position.


                                                              Storing the bimini top in the upright
                                  1                           position
                                                              NOTICE

                               2                              Do not trailer the boat with the bimini top
                                                              in the fully extended or upright storage po-
                              3                               sition. Put the bimini top in the fully col-
                                                              lapsed position to avoid damage.

                        1  Front strap
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye




















                        147]]></page><page Index="157"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 148  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To store the bimini top in the upright position:  Storing the bimini top in the fully
                        (1) Loosen each front strap, and then un-  collapsed position
                            hook the latch from the strap eye.  To store the bimini top in the fully collapsed
                                                              position:
                                   1                          (1) Follow the above steps for “Storing the
                                                                 bimini top in the upright position”.
                                                              (2) While supporting the bimini top, remove
                                                                 the lock pins securing the rear support
                                                                 poles to the rear support pole mounting
                                                                 brackets, and then hook each rear sup-
                                2
                                                                 port pole onto the main pole.
                              3

                        1  Front strap
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye
                                                                                          1
                        (2) Pull the bimini top toward the stern, and
                            then fold it.


                                                        1
                                                              1  Rear support pole

                                                              (3) Install  the protective cushions around
                                                                 the poles, and then lower the bimini top
                                                                 onto the rear deck.



                                                                              2
                        1  Bimini top

                        (3) Install the storage cover.               1
                         NOTICE
                        Do not trailer the boat with the bimini top
                        in the fully extended or upright position.
                        When transporting the boat, put the bimini
                                                              1  Protective cushion
                        top in the fully collapsed position to avoid
                                                              2  Bimini top
                        damage.





                                                                                             148]]></page><page Index="158"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 149  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Equipment operation

                        Trailering with the bimini top
                        The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                        trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                        lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                        If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                        cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        the ski tow hook to restrict movement.

                        Removing the bimini top
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                            mini top in the fully collapsed position”.
                        (2) Remove the lock pins securing the bimini
                            top to the main pole mounting brackets.


                                             1











                        1  Lock pin

                        (3) Remove the bimini top from the boat.
                        Installing the bimini top
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                        the lock pins are securely installed.












                        149]]></page><page Index="159"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 150  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                                Fuel requirement              ethanol content does not exceed 10% and
                        Fuel                                  the fuel meets minimum octane ratings. E-85
                                                              is a fuel blend containing 85% ethanol and
                             WARNING
                                                              therefore must not be used in this boat. All
                         Gasoline and  gasoline vapors are ex-  ethanol blends containing more than  10%
                          tremely flammable. To avoid  fires  and  ethanol can cause fuel system damage or en-
                          explosions and to reduce the risk of in-  gine performance problems.
                          jury when refueling, follow these in-  Yamaha does not recommend gasohol con-
                          structions.                         taining methanol because it can cause fuel
                         Gasoline is poisonous and can cause in-  system damage  and engine performance
                          jury or death. Handle gasoline with care.  problems.
                          Never siphon gasoline by mouth. If you  To fill the fuel tank:
                          should swallow some gasoline, inhale a  (1) Before refueling, turn off  the  engines.
                          lot of gasoline vapor, or get some gaso-  Never refuel while smoking, or while in
                          line in your eyes, see your doctor imme-  the vicinity of sparks, open  flames, or
                          diately. If gasoline spills on  your skin,  other sources of ignition.
                          wash with soap and water. If gasoline  (2) Refuel the boat in a well-ventilated area.
                          spills  on your clothing, change  your  If the boat is in the water, be sure it is se-
                          clothes.                               curely  moored to the  fueling dock. All
                                                                 passengers must be out of the boat dur-
                         NOTICE                                  ing refueling.
                                                              (3) Press the fuel tank filler cap button, and
                         Do  not  use leaded gasoline. Leaded
                                                                 then open the fuel tank filler cap.
                          gasoline can seriously damage the en-
                          gines.
                         Avoid getting water and contaminants in
                          the  fuel  tank. Contaminated fuel can
                          cause poor performance  and engine
                          damage. Use only fresh  gasoline that
                          has been stored in clean containers.                      1


                          Recommended fuel:
                                                                                    2
                            Regular unleaded gasoline with a
                            minimum octane rating of 86       1  Fuel tank filler cap
                            (Pump octane number) = (R + M)/2  2  Fuel tank filler cap button
                            90 (Research octane number)
                                                              (4) Slowly add fuel to the fuel tank.

                        Gasohol
                                                                Fuel tank capacity:
                        There are two types of gasohol: gasohol con-
                                                                  189 L (50.0 US gal, 41.6 Imp.gal)
                        taining ethanol and that containing methanol.
                        Gasohol containing ethanol  can be  used if

                                                                                             150]]></page><page Index="160"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 151  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        (5) Stop filling when the fuel just becomes  Engine oil requirement
                            visible in the bottom of the filler tube. Do  Engine oil
                            not “top off” the tank, because gasoline  NOTICE
                            could spill out.
                        (6) Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.  Use only 4-stroke engine oil. Usage of 2-
                        (7) Close the fuel tank filler cap by pushing it  stroke engine oil could result in severe en-
                            until it locks in place. Make sure that the  gine damage.
                            fuel tank filler cap is securely closed.
                                                              Select an oil grade according to the average
                        Engine Med RX Fuel Additive
                        As the fuel mixture burns in your engine’s  temperatures in the area where the boat will
                                                              be used.
                        combustion chambers, carbon deposits are
                        left behind. Over time, these deposits can re-
                        duce performance  and even  cause engine  Recommended engine oil:
                        damage. Marine engines tend to run at lower  YAMALUBE 4W
                        operating temperatures than other engines,  Recommended engine oil type:
                        making them more likely to accumulate these  SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-
                        harmful deposits. Engine Med RX, available  50
                        from your Yamaha Boat Dealer, is formulated  Recommended engine oil grade
                        to remove existing deposits and, when used  (3-star models):
                        continuously, prevent new ones from form-  API SG, SH, SJ, SL
                        ing, while also helping to keep fuel injectors  Recommended engine oil grade
                        and other fuel system components clean for  (4-star models):
                        proper performance and longer engine life.  API SJ, SL
                                                              3-star models




























                        151]]></page><page Index="161"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 152  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models                         Checking the engine oil level
                                                              (AR210 / SX210)
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-
                                                              ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                                                              contact with or getting any engine oil on
                                                              your clothes could result in burns.

                                                              NOTICE
                                                               Do not run the engine with too much or
                        TIP:                                   not enough oil in the oil tank, otherwise
                        When the engine is operated at high speeds,  the engine could be damaged.
                        some engine oil may be consumed. Be sure   Make sure that debris and water do not
                        to check the engine oil level.         enter the oil tank filler hole. Debris and
                                                               water in the engine oil can cause serious
                        Why Yamalube                           engine damage.
                        YAMALUBE oil is a Genuine YAMAHA Part
                                                              TIP:
                        born of the engineers’ passion and belief that
                                                               When checking the engine oil level on land,
                        engine oil is an important liquid engine com-
                                                               the engine must be running while water is
                        ponent. We form teams of specialists in the
                                                               being supplied to the cooling water pas-
                        fields of mechanical engineering, chemistry,
                                                               sages. (See “Flushing the cooling system”
                        electronics and track testing, and have them
                                                               on page 192 for information on supplying
                        develop the engine together with the oil it will
                                                               water.)
                        use. Yamalube oils take full advantage of the
                                                               When checking the engine oil level on wa-
                        base oil’s qualities and blend in the ideal bal-
                                                               ter, moor the boat so that it will not drift
                        ance of additives to make sure the final oil
                                                               away.
                        clears our performance standards. Thus,
                        Yamalube mineral, semisynthetic and syn-
                                                              To check the engine oil level:
                        thetic oils have their own distinct characters
                                                              (1) With the engine stopped, place the boat
                        and value. Yamaha’s experience gained over
                                                                 in a precisely level position on land or
                        many years of research  and development
                                                                 launch the boat.
                        into oil since the  1960’s helps make
                                                              (2) Look in all directions, and then start the
                        Yamalube the best choice for your Yamaha
                                                                 engine. (See page 175 for information on
                        engine.
                                                                 starting the engine.)
                                                              (3) Run the engine at idling speed for 6 min-
                                                                 utes or more. Run the engine an addi-
                                                                 tional 5 minutes if  the  ambient
                                                                 temperature is 20 °C (68 °F) or less.
                                                              (4) Stop the engine.
                                                              (5) Open the engine hood. (See page 126.)
                                                                                             152]]></page><page Index="162"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 153  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        (6) Loosen the oil tank filler cap and remove  (10) Securely install the oil tank filler cap and
                            it, and then wipe  the attached dipstick  turn it until it stops.
                            clean.                            (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure
                                                                 for the other engine.
                                                              (12) Close the engine hood.

                                                              Checking the engine oil
                                                              (except for AR210 / SX210)
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-
                                                     1        ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                                                              contact with or getting any engine oil on
                                                              your clothes could result in burns.
                        1  Oil tank filler cap/Dipstick
                                                              NOTICE
                        (7) Screw the oil tank filler cap into the filler
                            hole until it stops. Remove the oil tank  Make sure debris and water do not enter
                            filler cap again and make sure that the  the oil filler hole. Debris and water in the
                            engine oil level is between the minimum  engine oil can cause serious engine dam-
                            and maximum level marks.          age.
                                                              To check the engine oil level:
                                                              (1) Place the boat in a precisely level posi-
                                                                 tion on land with the engine stopped. If
                                                                 the engine was running, allow the engine
                                                                 oil to settle by waiting 5 minutes or more
                                                                 before checking the oil level.
                                1    2      3                 (2) Open the engine hood. (See page 126.)
                                                              (3) Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
                                                              3-star models

                        1  Dipstick
                        2  Maximum level mark                               1
                        3  Minimum level mark
                        (8) If the  engine oil  level is significantly
                            above the maximum level mark, consult
                            a Yamaha Boat dealer. If the engine oil
                            level is below the minimum level mark,
                            slowly add engine oil.
                        (9) Repeat steps (6)–(8) until the engine oil is
                                                              1  Dipstick
                            at the proper level.


                        153]]></page><page Index="163"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 154  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models                         4-star models



                                        1
                                                                                      1
                                                                                         2







                        1  Dipstick                           1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                        (4) Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick
                            tube  completely. Remove the  dipstick  (5) If the engine oil  level  is  significantly
                            again and check that the engine oil level  above the maximum level mark, consult
                            is between the minimum level mark and  a Yamaha Boat Dealer. If the engine oil
                            maximum level mark.                  level is below the minimum level mark,
                        3-star models                            add engine oil.
                                                              (6) Remove the engine oil filler cap.


                                                1                                      1
                                                   2









                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark
                                                              1  Engine oil filler cap
                                                              (7) Slowly add engine oil.
                                                              (8) Wait approximately 5 minutes to allow
                                                                 the engine oil to settle, and then check
                                                                 the engine oil level again.
                                                              (9) Repeat steps 3–8 until the engine oil is at
                                                                 the proper level.
                                                              (10) Install the engine oil filler cap.
                                                              (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure
                                                                 for the other engine.
                                                              (12) Close the engine hood.

                                                                                             154]]></page><page Index="164"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 155  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                            Draining the bilge water          Engine compartment (AR210 / SX210)
                         NOTICE

                         Do  not  run the engines at full throttle
                          when bilge water remains in the engine
                          compartment. The bilge water can                                 1
                          splash into the engines, which can result
                          in severe damage.
                         Be sure all drain plugs are tightened be-
                          fore  operating your boat. Otherwise,
                          water may flood the boat and cause it to
                          submerge.                           1  Engine compartment drain plug
                                                              Engine compartment (except for AR210 /
                        Draining the bilge water on land      SX210)
                        This model is equipped with multiple  drain
                        plugs. Bilge water from the various compart-
                        ments flows through drain passages and col-
                        lects in the bottom of the hull. The bilge water
                        can be drained from the boat by removing the
                        hull drain plugs.                                             BOW    1

                        Ski locker


                                                              1  Engine compartment drain plug





                                             1



                        1  Drain plug














                        155]]></page><page Index="165"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 156  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        To drain the bilge water from the hull:  Draining the bilge water on water
                        Remove the hull drain  plug  at  the stern  to  This model is equipped with a self-draining
                        drain the water. Check the condition of the  deck and bilge pump to drain the bilge water
                        O-ring on the  hull drain  plug,  and then se-  on water.
                        curely install the drain plug.
                                                              Self-draining deck
                                                              Most water that enters the deck area drains
                                                              automatically out the stern through the large
                                                              drain hole in the deck.
                                                              A one-way check valve in the drain prevents
                                                              water from traveling back to the deck while
                                                              the boat is moored or moving in reverse.

                                                              Bilge pump (AR210 / SX210)
                                                 1
                                                              Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-
                                                              tem that channels water that enters the boat
                        1  Hull drain plug
                                                              from the storage compartments to the bilge
                                                              under the engine compartment.
                                                              When the bilge pump switch is turned on, the
                                                              bilge pump will operate.




                                                                            HORN
                                                                                      1
                                                                            BILGE
                                                                            NAVI
                                                                            ANC
                                                                           CTSY
                                                                           LIGHTS


                                                              1  Bilge pump switch

















                                                                                             156]]></page><page Index="166"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 157  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                                                              from the storage compartments to the bilge
                                                              under the engine compartment.
                                                              When the “Bilge” button is tapped, the bilge
                                                              pump will operate.
                                                              212 / 212S
                                                                                         1

                                                                 Dock
                                                  1              Interior                  Ballast

                                                                Navigation                  Blower
                        1  Bilge pump outlet
                                                                Anchor                      Bilge
                        TIP:
                        The  bilge pump indicator light comes  on
                        while the bilge pump is operating.
                                                              1  “Bilge” button
                                                              212SE / 212SD / 121XE / 121XD

                                      HORN
                                                                                     SE
                                                                FUEL
                                      BILGE
                                                                100 %
                                       NAVI
                                       ANC
                                                                    19
                                                                           x1000 rpm
                                      CTSY
                                      LIGHTS
                                                                   START
                                                                   13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                        Even if the bilge pump switch is not turned
                        on, the bilge pump will detect when there is         1
                        excessive water in the bilge and will automat-  1  “Bilge” button
                        ically drain most of it through the bilge pump
                        outlet. This function works automatically,
                        even if the battery switches are turned to the
                        off position.
                        TIP:
                        When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                        the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                        bilge water is drained.

                        Bilge pump (except for AR210 / SX210)                          1
                        Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-
                        tem that channels water that enters the boat  1  Bilge pump outlet



                        157]]></page><page Index="167"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 158  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                         Operation and handling requirements


                        TIP:
                         212 / 212S: The bilge pump indicator light
                          comes on while the bilge pump is operat-
                          ing.













                                           1
                        1  Bilge pump indicator light

                         The bilge pump will operate every 2 min-
                          utes automatically, even if the “Bilge” but-
                          ton is not tapped.

                        Even if the “Bilge” button is not tapped to op-
                        erate the bilge pump, the bilge pump will de-
                        tect when there is excessive water in the bilge
                        and will automatically drain most of it through
                        the bilge pump outlet. This  function works
                        automatically, even if the battery switches are
                        turned to the off position.
                        TIP:
                        When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                        the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                        bilge water is drained.

















                                                                                             158]]></page><page Index="168"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 159  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        First-time operation

                                 Engine break-in                      Engine break-in
                                 (AR210 / SX210)                (except for AR210 / SX210)
                         NOTICE                               NOTICE

                        Failure to perform the engine break-in  Failure to  perform the engine break-in
                        could result in reduced engine life or even  could result in reduced engine life or even
                        severe engine damage.                 severe engine damage.

                        The engine break-in period is essential to al-  The engine break-in period is essential to al-
                        low the various components of the engines to  low the various components of the engines to
                        wear and polish themselves to the correct  wear and polish themselves to the correct
                        operating clearances. This ensures proper  operating clearances. This ensures proper
                        performance and promotes longer compo-  performance and promotes  longer  compo-
                        nent life.                            nent life.
                        (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 152  (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 153
                            for information on checking  the  engine  for information on checking the engine
                            oil level.)                          oil level.)
                        (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.  (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.
                            (See page 175 for information on starting  (See page 175 for information on starting
                            the engines.)                        the engines.)
                        (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the  (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the
                            engines at idling speed.             engines at trolling speed.
                        (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the  (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the
                            engines speed below 5000 r/min.      engines speed below 5000 r/min.
                        (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-  (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-
                            gines speed below 6500 r/min.        gines speed below 6000 r/min.
                        After the engine break-in is complete, the  After the engine break-in is complete,  the
                        boat can be operated normally.        boat can be operated normally.























                        159]]></page><page Index="169"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 160  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks


                             WARNING
                        Failure to inspect or maintain the boat properly increases the possibility of an accident
                        or damage to the boat. Do not operate the boat if you find any problem.
                        If a problem cannot be corrected by the procedures provided in this manual, have the
                        boat inspected by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.

                        Pre-operation checklist
                        Before operating this boat, perform the checks in the following checklist. Always follow the in-
                        spection and maintenance procedures and schedules described in this owner’s/operator’s man-
                        ual.
                        Pre-operation checks should be made each time the boat is used. These checks can be com-
                        pleted in a short time. It is worth the time spent to ensure safety and reliability.
                                 ITEM                          CHECK                     PAGE
                         PRE-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Steering system       Check for proper steering operation.       162
                         Remote control levers  Check for proper throttle operation.      162
                                               Check for proper shift operation.
                         Fire extinguisher     Check readiness of the extinguisher.       163
                         Hull                  Check hull for damage and cracks before launching.  —
                         Access port caps      Check for proper installation.             165
                         Jet intakes           Check that no debris is in the intakes before launching.  165
                         Fuel system           Check fuel system for leaks.               165
                         Engine oil level      Check engine oil level; add as necessary.  152, 153
                         Battery               Check battery condition, mounting, and connection.  167
                         (AR210 / SX210)
                         Batteries
                         (except for AR210 / SX210)
                         Bilge water           Check the engine compartment for bilge water.  167
                         Drain plug            Check the drain plug for damage and foreign material   167
                                               and check that they are securely installed.
                         Engine compartment and   Open the engine hood and check to be sure no gasoline,   168, 168
                         blowers               gasoline vapors, or loose electrical connections are
                                               present. Operate the blowers for at least 4 minutes.
                         Engine hood           Check that the hood latch is secure.       126
                         Lights and horn       Check lights to be sure they operate. Push the horn   169, 171
                                               switch/button to be sure it operates.
                         Bimini top            Check that the top is secure.            142, 146
                         Engine shut-off cord (lan-  Check the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) for damage.  172
                         yard)
                         Collapsible tower fasteners  Check that the tower fasteners are secured.  140
                         (except for SX210 / 212)







                                                                                             160]]></page><page Index="170"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 161  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks


                                 ITEM                          CHECK                     PAGE
                         POST-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Switches              Check operation of the main switches and engine shut-  172
                                               off switch.
                         Cooling water pilot outlets  Check that water comes out while the engines are run-  173
                                               ning.
                         Fuel level            Check fuel level; add as necessary.        173
                        The steering and shifting pre-operation checks will require two persons: one person to oper-
                        ate the controls and one person to observe the proper operation at the stern.



















































                        161]]></page><page Index="171"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 162  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                           Pre-operation check points
                        Pre-launch checks
                        Perform the pre-launch checks in the pre-op-
                        eration checklist while the boat is on land.

                        Steering system checks
                        Make sure the steering wheel is not loose.
                        There should not be any free play, either in-  1                   1
                        and-out or in rotation. Turn the steering wheel           2
                        fully to the right and left to make sure opera-
                        tion is smooth  and unrestricted throughout  1  Jet thrust nozzle
                        the whole range.                      2  Articulating keel

                                                              Remote control lever checks
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Do not touch the shift gates while the re-
                                                              mote control levers are being operated,
                                                              otherwise, you could be pinched.
                            1
                                                              Operate the remote control levers several
                                                              times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              throughout the whole range.
                        1  Steering wheel
                                                                              N
                        Make sure both jet thrust nozzles change di-  F 3  2  5  1  5   4 R
                        rections as the steering wheel is turned. The
                        jet thrust nozzles should point to starboard  7                     7
                        (right) when the wheel is turned to the right.      6     6
                        The jet thrust  nozzles should point to port  8                       8
                        (left) when the wheel is turned to the left.
                        There should not be free play between the
                        steering wheel and the jet thrust nozzles. In
                        addition, check that the direction of the artic-
                                                              1  Neutral position
                        ulating keel changes according to the move-  2  TDE position
                        ment of the jet thrust nozzles.       3  Forward position
                                                              4  Reverse position
                                                              5  Shift
                                                              6  Fully closed
                                                              7  Throttle
                                                              8  Fully open




                                                                                             162]]></page><page Index="172"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 163  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Check that the shift gates are slightly above  ically to  their original positions  when re-
                        the shift gate neutral position when the re-  leased.
                        mote control levers are in the forward posi-
                        tion, and that the shift gates are in the fully
                        open position when the remote control levers
                        are moved farther forward.
                        Fully open position                   1

                                      1                 1





                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle
                                                              Fire extinguisher check
                                                              As an inboard boat less than 26 feet in length,
                                                              your boat must be fitted with one 5-B (B-1)
                        1  Shift gate                         type fire extinguisher when navigating waters
                                                              controlled by the U.S. Coast Guard. In addi-
                        Check that the shift gates are in the fully
                                                              tion, most state and local boating laws re-
                        closed position when the remote control le-
                                                              quire that the craft carry a USCG-approved
                        vers are in the reverse position.
                                                              fire extinguisher whenever the boat is operat-
                        Fully closed position
                                                              ed.
                                                              Make sure at least one fire extinguisher is
                                                              aboard and full; two fire extinguishers are
                                                              recommended. See the instructions supplied
                                                              by the  extinguisher manufacturer to deter-
                                                              mine the indication of the condition.
                                                              A fire extinguisher is not standard equipment
                                                              with this boat. If you do not have a fire extin-
                                                              guisher,  contact your local  Yamaha Boat
                             1                      1
                                                              Dealer or fire extinguisher dealer for one
                                                              meeting the proper specifications.
                        1  Shift gate
                                                              Storing the fire extinguisher
                        Throttle/shift paddle checks
                                                              One fire extinguisher is to be mounted in the
                        (212SD / 212XD)
                                                              driver’s side console storage compartment.
                        Operate the throttle/shift paddles several
                                                              The fire extinguisher recommended for this
                        times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              location is a chemical-type extinguisher with
                        throughout the whole range. Also, make sure
                                                              a capacity of two pounds or more.
                        that the throttle/shift paddles return automat-

                        163]]></page><page Index="173"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 164  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks












                                                                 1



                        If you choose to have two fire extinguishers,  1  FIRE-PORT™
                        the other fire extinguisher is to be mounted in
                        the rear  underseat storage  compartment
                        (port). There is a location label outside the
                        compartment. This fire extinguisher located
                        near the engine compartment  should  be a
                        “clean agent” type designed to displace oxy-
                        gen, with an inert gas, such as CO , or FE-
                                                    2
                        36™, and have a capacity of five pounds or
                        more.



                                                              A FIRE-PORT™ is mounted below the rear
                                                              center seat. Use this port to spray the con-
                                                              tents  of a fire  extinguisher into the engine
                                                              compartment if a fire breaks out in the engine
                                                              area. WARNING! If there is a fire in the en-
                                                              gine compartment, opening the hatch will
                                                              add more oxygen to  the fire, increasing
                                                              the risk of a larger fire or an explosion.
                                                              If you see smoke or otherwise suspect a fire,
                        Operating the fire extinguisher       you can look through the transparent flaps of
                        A  chemical-type fire extinguisher may not  the FIRE-PORT™ to look for signs of flames.
                        help when sprayed into the engine compart-  If there is a fire, push the nozzle of the fire ex-
                        ment through the FIRE-PORT™ because that  tinguisher through the FIRE-PORT™ and fol-
                        type needs to be aimed directly at the base of  low the manufacturer’s instructions to empty
                        the flames to be  effective. See below  for  the contents of the fire extinguisher into the
                        FIRE-PORT™ information.               engine compartment.
                                                              A “clean agent” type fire extinguisher is rec-
                                                              ommended; a chemical-type fire extinguisher
                                                              may not be adequate in this application.


                                                                                             164]]></page><page Index="174"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 165  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        Access port cap check
                        Make sure that the access port caps are se-
                        curely installed.
                        To check the access port caps:
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            132 for information on the rear platform
                            hatch.)
                        (2) Make sure that the access port caps are     1
                            securely installed. If they are removed or
                            are  not locked, securely install  them.
                            (See page 214 for information on the ac-  1  Jet intake
                            cess port caps.)
                                                              In some cases, the engines may overheat be-
                                                              cause of a lack of cooling water, and damage
                                                              could result.  If the jet  intakes are clogged,
                                                      1
                                                              clean them. (See page 214 for information on
                                                              the jet intakes.) WARNING! Rotating parts
                                                              could cause severe injury or death. Before
                                                              attempting to remove weeds or debris
                                                              from the jet intakes or impeller areas; shut
                                                              off the engines, remove the main switch
                                                              keys, and then remove the engine shut-off
                        1  Access port cap                    cord (lanyard) from the  engine shut-off
                                                              switch.
                        (3) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              Fuel system checks
                        Jet intake checks                     Check the fuel filler hoses and joints in the en-
                        Carefully check the jet intakes under the boat  gine compartment for  damage, looseness,
                        for weeds, debris, or anything else that might  and signs of leaking. At least annually, or if a
                        restrict the intake of water. If the intakes are  problem  is suspected, check the  fuel tank
                        clogged, cavitation could occur, reducing jet  and fuel filler  hoses and clamps. Have a
                        thrust, and possibly  damaging jet pump  Yamaha Boat Dealer check the fuel tank and
                        parts.                                fuel filler hoses and clamps.  WARNING! If
                                                              there are signs of leaking fuel, do not op-
                                                              erate the boat until the source of the fuel
                                                              leak is found and corrected. Gasoline and
                                                              its vapors are highly flammable and explo-
                                                              sive.







                        165]]></page><page Index="175"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 166  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Engine oil level check                3-star models (212 / 212S / 212SE /
                        Make sure that the engine oil level is between  212SD / 212XE / 212XD)
                        the minimum level mark and maximum level
                        mark on the dipstick. (See page 152, 153 for        1
                        information on checking the engine oil level.)
                        3-star models (AR210 / SX210)








                                                              1  Dipstick
                                                     1


                        1  Oil tank filler cap/Dipstick
                                                                                     1
                                                                                        2









                                                              1  Maximum level mark
                                1    2      3
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                                                              4-star models (212 / 212S / 212SE / 212XE)
                        1  Dipstick
                        2  Maximum level mark
                        3  Minimum level mark                                1










                                                              1  Dipstick






                                                                                             166]]></page><page Index="176"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 167  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              Except for AR210 / SX210



                                                                                    1     2
                                                 1                       1
                                                   2
                                                                       2






                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark                 1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead
                                                              2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead
                        Battery check
                                                              Bilge water check
                        Make sure that the battery terminals are not
                                                              Make sure that no bilge water has collected in
                        damaged and that the battery leads are con-
                                                              the engine compartment. If bilge water has
                        nected properly. (See pages 196 and 197 for
                                                              collected in the engine compartment drain it.
                        battery cover removal and installation proce-
                                                              (See page 155 for information on draining the
                        dures.)  WARNING! The battery must al-
                                                              bilge water.)
                        ways be fully  charged  and in  good
                        condition. Loss of battery power may
                                                              Drain plug check
                        leave you stranded. Never  operate the
                                                              Loosen the drain plug and remove it, and
                        boat if the battery does not have sufficient
                                                              then make sure that the plug and the O-ring
                        power to start the engines or if it shows
                                                              on the hull drain plug are not damaged and
                        any other signs of decreased power.
                                                              that there is no foreign material on the
                        AR210 / SX210
                                                              threads or the O-ring on the hull drain plug.
                                                              NOTICE: Before installing the drain plug,
                                                              clean the  drain plug threads and the  O-
                                       2   1                  ring on the hull drain plug to remove any
                                                              foreign materials, such as dirt or sand.
                                                              Otherwise, the drain plug could be dam-
                                                              aged, allowing water to enter the engine
                                                              compartment.  Make sure that the drain
                                                              plug is tightened securely before launch-
                                                              ing the boat. Otherwise, water may flood
                                                              the boat and cause it to submerge.
                        1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead
                                                              Securely install the drain plug by tightening it
                        2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead
                                                              until it stop.





                        167]]></page><page Index="177"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 168  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks











                                                                         1

                                                 1

                        1  Hull drain plug                    1  Blower

                        Blower switch check (AR210 / SX210)   Push the blower switch to operate the blow-
                                                              ers and ventilate the engine compartment for
                             WARNING
                                                              at least 4 minutes.
                        Gasoline vapors can explode.  Before
                        starting the engines, check the engine  Blower checks
                        compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-  (except for AR210 / SX210)
                        pors, and loose electrical connections,
                                                                  WARNING
                        and then operate the blowers for at least 4
                        minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-  Gasoline vapors  can explode. Before
                        ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline  starting the engines, check the engine
                        vapors in the  engine compartment or if  compartment for  gasoline, gasoline va-
                        there are any loose electrical connections.  pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a  and then operate the blowers for at least 4
                        problem you cannot locate or correct.  minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-
                                                              ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline
                        Make sure that the blowers operate properly
                                                              vapors in the engine compartment or if
                        when the blower switch is pushed.
                                                              there are any loose electrical connections.
                                                              Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a
                                                              problem you cannot locate or correct.
                             1       BLOWER                   Make sure that the blowers operate properly.










                        1  Blower switch




                                                                                             168]]></page><page Index="178"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 169  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks




                                                                                     SE
                                                                FUEL
                                                                100 %
                                                                    19
                                                                           x1000 rpm
                                   1
                                                                   START
                                                                   13.0  V  9
                                                                             Bilge  Blower
                                                                                  1
                        1  Blower                             1  “Blower” button

                        212 / 212S                            TIP:
                        (1) Tap the “Blower” button and check that  You can also tap the blower indicator on the
                            the blowers operate.              status indicator bar to turn the blowers on or
                                                              off.
                                                    1
                                                              Navigation and anchor lights switch
                            Dock
                                                              check (AR210 / SX210)
                           Interior                   Ballast
                                                              Make sure that the bow light and anchor light
                          Navigation                  Blower
                                                              operate properly.
                           Anchor                      Bilge  The procedure for setting up the anchor light
                                                              varies according to the model. See the page
                                                              indicated below for your boat.
                                                              SX210: See page 135.
                        1  “Blower” button                    TIP:
                                                              SX210: Before operating the boat in daylight
                        (2) Tap the “Blower” button to turn off the  hours after checking the navigation and an-
                            blowers.                          chor lights, store the anchor light.


                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                        Tap the “Blower” button on the system con-
                        trol screen. Check that the blowers operate
                        when the button is blue and that the blowers
                        stop when the button is gray.










                        169]]></page><page Index="179"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 170  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        AR210



                                 2                                          HORN
                                                  1
                                                                            BILGE
                                                                                     1
                                                                            NAVI
                                                                            ANC
                                                                           CTSY
                                                                           LIGHTS

                                                              1  Navigation and anchor lights switch
                        1  Bow light
                        2  Anchor light                       Navigation and anchor lights checks
                                                              (except for AR210 / SX210)
                        SX210
                                                              Make sure that the bow light and anchor light
                                                              operate properly.
                                    2
                                                              The procedure for setting up the anchor light
                                                              varies according to the model. See the page
                                                  1
                                                              indicated below for your boat.
                                                              212: See page 135.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              212: Before operating the boat in daylight
                                                              hours after checking the navigation and an-
                                                              chor lights, store the anchor light.
                        1  Bow light
                                                              212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                        2  Anchor light
                        To check the operation using the switch panel:
                        Push the right side of the navigation and an-  2
                                                                                        1
                        chor lights switch and  check that the bow
                        light and anchor light come on.
                        Push the left side of the navigation and an-
                        chor lights switch and check that only the an-
                        chor light comes on.
                        Put the navigation and anchor lights switch in
                        the middle position and check that the bow
                        light and anchor light are off.       1  Bow light
                                                              2  Anchor light







                                                                                             170]]></page><page Index="180"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 171  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        212                                   212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                                                              (1) Tap the “Navigation” light button on the
                                    2                            system control screen. Check that the
                                                                 bow light and anchor light come on when
                                                  1              the button is blue and that both lights go
                                                                 off when the button is gray.
                                                              (2) Tap the “Anchor” light button on the sys-
                                                                 tem control screen. Check that only the
                                                                 anchor light comes on when the button is
                                                                 blue and that the anchor light goes off
                                                                 when the button is gray.
                        1  Bow light
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                        2  Anchor light
                                                                      SW
                                                                                          DEPTH
                        212 / 212S                                                         .8 9  ft
                        To check the operation using the multi-func-
                                                                                        19
                        tion display:                                          x1000 rpm
                        (1) Tap the “Navigation” light button on the
                            system control screen. Check that  the                     HOUSE
                                                                                   9   13.0  V
                            bow light and anchor light come on when      Nav  Anchor
                            the button is blue and that both lights go   1    2
                            off when the button is gray.
                                                              1  “Navigation” light button
                        (2) Tap the “Anchor” light button on the sys-
                                                              2  “Anchor” light button
                            tem control screen. Check that only the
                            anchor light comes on when the button is
                                                              Horn check
                            blue and that the anchor light goes off
                                                              AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S
                            when the button is gray.
                                                              Push the horn switch/button and check that
                               1  2                           the horn sounds.
                                                              AR210 / SX210
                            Dock
                           Interior                   Ballast
                          Navigation                  Blower                         1
                                                                            HORN
                           Anchor                      Bilge
                                                                            BILGE
                                                                            NAVI
                                                                            ANC
                                                                           CTSY
                                                                           LIGHTS
                        1  “Navigation” light button
                        2  “Anchor” light button
                                                              1  Horn switch




                        171]]></page><page Index="181"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 172  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        212 / 212S




                                        HORN          1









                        1  Horn button
                                                              Post-launch checks
                                                              Perform the post-launch checks in the pre-
                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                                                              operation checklist while  the boat  is in  the
                        Push the “HORN” switch and check that the
                                                              water and the engines are running.
                        horn sounds.
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                                                              Engine shut-off switch check
                        operating.
                                                              Check the engine shut-off switch for proper
                                                              operation.
                                                              (1) Start the engines. (See page 175 for in-
                                                12V
                                                                 formation on starting the engines.)
                                                              (2) Pull the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to
                                                                 remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                                                BILGE
                                                                 switch to make sure that the engines
                                                     HORN
                                                         1       stop immediately.
                                                              (3) Make  sure that  the engines cannot  be
                                                                 started with the clip removed from the
                                                                 engine shut-off switch.
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S
                        Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check
                        Make sure that the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                        yard) is not damaged. If the cord is damaged,                    2
                        replace it.  WARNING! Never try to repair
                        the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) or tie it
                        together. The engine  shut-off cord (lan-                 1
                        yard) may not pull free when the operator
                        falls off, allowing the boat to continue to
                        run and cause an accident.
                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Clip


                                                                                             172]]></page><page Index="182"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 173  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD         es. If water is not flowing out of the pilot
                                                              outlets during operation, do not continue
                                                              to run the engines. Overheating and seri-
                                                              ous damage could occur. (See “Over tem-
                                                    1
                                                              perature warning” on page 62, 93 for more
                                                              information.)
                                                    2
                                                              Fuel level check
                                                              Check the amount of fuel remaining in the
                                                              fuel tank using the fuel level bar graph on the
                                                              multi-function display.
                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              AR210 / SX210
                        2  Clip
                                                                        10:27 am
                        Cooling water pilot outlet check
                        Check that water comes out from the pilot    FUEL
                                                                1
                        outlets while the engines are running in the  100%           0
                        water. If water is not circulating, something                      MPH
                        may be clogging the intake grates. Refer to
                        “Jet pump clean-out procedure” on page
                        214.                                                        0.3 Avg MPG
                                                                     12.3V

                                                              1  Fuel level bar graph
                                                              212 / 212S
                                                                        10:27  am
                                                                        13.0  V
                                                                     FUEL       NW    N    NE
                                                                    100 %            SPEED
                                                                1        START

                        TIP:                                                               MPH
                        It  may take up to 20 seconds for water  to
                        reach the pilot outlets when  first launching
                                                                      1350RPM
                        the boat. The amount and force of the exiting       Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                        water will vary with engine speed.
                                                              1  Fuel level bar graph
                         NOTICE
                        A continuous flow of water from the pilot
                        outlets shows  that water is  flowing
                        through the engine cooling water passag-



                        173]]></page><page Index="183"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 174  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                            1



                                              SE    S
                          FUEL
                          100 %
                              19
                                     x1000 rpm
                                                    MPH
                             START
                             13.0  V  9
                                      Bilge  Blower
                        1  Fuel level bar graph

                        Add fuel if necessary. (See page 150 for infor-
                        mation on filling the fuel tank.)










































                                                                                             174]]></page><page Index="184"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 175  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                                Driving your boat             time spent checking the boat will reward you
                        Getting to know your boat             with added safety and reliability.
                        Operating your boat requires skills acquired  Know  and follow  U.S. Coast Guard, state,
                        through practice over a period of time. Take  and local laws when operating your boat.
                        the time to learn the basic techniques well  Select a wide area to learn in, where visibility
                        before attempting more difficult maneuvers.  is good and other boat traffic is light. Keep
                        Boating with your new boat can be a very en-  the proper distance from other boats and ve-
                        joyable activity, providing you with hours of  hicles.  Do not operate where people  are
                        pleasure. But it is essential to familiarize your-  swimming.
                        self with the operation of the boat to achieve
                        the skill necessary to enjoy boating safely.
                        Before operating this boat, read this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, the  Operation  In-
                        struction card, and all labels on the boat. Pay
                        particular attention to the safety information
                        beginning on page 16. These  materials
                        should give you an understanding of the boat
                        and its operation. This boat is designed to
                        carry one operator and up to 9 passengers.   Always attach the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                                                              yard) to your PFD before operating.
                          Maximum load (212XE / 212XD):       You  and all  other passengers must always
                            Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and  wear a USCG-approved PFD when riding in
                            passengers:                       the boat.
                              953 kg (2100 lb): ballast is empty  Grip the steering wheel firmly and keep both
                              495 kg (1092 lb): ballast is full  feet on the deck when driving the boat.
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                            gers:                             Starting the engines
                              843 kg (1860 lb): ballast is empty
                                                                  WARNING
                              386 kg (852 lb): ballast is full
                          Maximum load                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                          (except for 212XE / 212XD):         nore any of the following:
                            Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and   Before operating your boat, become fa-
                            passengers:                        miliar  with all controls. Consult a
                              998 kg (2200 lb)                 Yamaha Boat Dealer about any control
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  or function you do not fully understand.
                            gers:                              Failure to understand how the controls
                              843 kg (1860 lb)                 work could cause  an accident or pre-
                                                               vent you from avoiding an accident.
                                                               Gasoline vapors can  explode.  Before
                        Learning to operate your boat
                                                               starting the engines, check the engine
                        Before boating, always perform the pre-oper-
                                                               compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-
                        ation checks listed on page 160. The short
                                                               pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        175]]></page><page Index="185"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 176  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                          and then operate the blowers for at least  NOTICE
                          4 minutes. Do not start the engines or
                          operate the blowers if  you can  smell  There is a hull drain plug at the bottom of
                          gasoline vapors in the engine compart-  the stern. Check  the  O-ring on the hull
                          ment or if there are any loose electrical  drain plug and make sure that the plug is
                          connections. Contact a  Yamaha Boat  tightened securely  before launching the
                          Dealer if there is a problem you cannot  boat. Otherwise, water may flood the boat
                          locate or correct.                  and cause it to submerge.
                         Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          to your PFD before operating. Failure to
                          attach the cord could  result in a run-
                          away boat if the operator is ejected.
                         Do not apply throttle when anyone is at
                          the rear of the boat. Turn the engines off
                          or keep them at idle. Water and debris
                          exiting the jet thrust nozzles can cause
                          severe injury.
                                                                                       1
                        (1) Always make sure the boat is launched
                            and used in waters that are free from  1  Hull drain plug
                            weeds and  debris,  and at least 90 cm
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.  (2) Turn the battery switch to the ON (green)
                            WARNING! Never operate in water      position.
                            that is less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep from  (3) AR210 / SX210: Push the blower switch
                            the bottom of the boat. You increase  to operate the blowers and ventilate the
                            your chance of hitting an underwater  engine compartment for at least 4 min-
                            obstacle. You could be injured. Peb-  utes.
                            bles or sand can also be sucked into
                            the  jet intakes,  damaging the impel-
                            lers.
                                                                  1        BLOWER






                                     90 cm (3 ft)


                                                              1  Blower switch







                                                                                             176]]></page><page Index="186"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 177  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                        (4) AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S: Turn the  TIP:
                            main switch keys to the on position to  You can also push the “BLOWER” switch to
                            operate the blowers automatically for 5  ventilate the engine compartment.
                            minutes.
                            212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD: Turn
                            the battery switch to the ON position to
                                                                                     12V
                            operate the blowers automatically for 5
                            minutes.
                        TIP:
                                                                                     BILGE
                                                                                           HORN
                        To operate the blowers manually, tap the
                                                                                  1
                        “Blower” button. Ventilate  the  engine com-
                        partment for at least 4 minutes, and then tap
                        the “Blower” button again  to turn off  the
                        blowers.
                                                              1  “BLOWER” switch
                        212 / 212S
                                                    1         (5) Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                                                                 to your PFD. Install the clip onto the en-
                            Dock
                                                                 gine shut-off switch by pushing the clip
                           Interior                   Ballast    groove over the nut beneath the knob.
                                                                 Be sure the cord is not wrapped around
                          Navigation                  Blower
                                                                 the steering wheel or tangled in the con-
                           Anchor                      Bilge
                                                                 trols.  WARNING! Check that the en-
                                                                 gine shut-off cord  (lanyard) is
                                                                 attached correctly. If the engine shut-
                                                                 off cord (lanyard) is not attached cor-
                        1  “Blower” button                       rectly, it may not pull  free  when the
                                                                 operator falls off, allowing the boat to
                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                                                                 continue to  run and cause an  acci-
                                                                 dent.
                                                SE
                           FUEL
                           100 %
                              19
                                      x1000 rpm

                              START
                             13.0  V  9
                                       Bilge  Blower
                                            1
                        1  “Blower” button






                        177]]></page><page Index="187"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 178  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        212 / 212S                               If the engines do not start after 5 sec-
                                                                 onds of cranking, release the keys. Wait
                                    1                            at least 15 seconds before trying to start
                                       2
                                                                 the engines again.

                                              3

                                                                             HORN




                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                        2  Clip
                        3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD         NOTICE

                                                               Never turn the main switch keys to the
                                                               start position while the engines are run-
                                                3              ning. The starter mechanisms could be
                                                               damaged.
                                                               If the starter motors are engaged con-
                                                               tinuously for more than 5 seconds, the
                                   1
                                                               battery will become quickly discharged
                                   2                           and it will be impossible to start the en-
                                                               gines. The starter motors may also be
                                                               damaged if they are  engaged  continu-
                        1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                               ously for more than 5 seconds.
                        2  Clip
                        3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                                                              (8) 212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD: Turn
                                                                 the main switch key to the on position.
                        TIP:
                        The engines will not start when the clip is re-
                        moved from the engine shut-off switch. The
                        starter motors will turn over without the cord
                        attached.
                        (6) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                            tral position. The starter motors will not
                            operate unless the remote control levers
                            are in neutral.
                        (7) AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S: Turn the
                            main switch  keys to the start  position
                            and release them when the engines start.


                                                                                             178]]></page><page Index="188"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 179  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                        (9) 212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD: Push  mended. Let the engines cool off at idle or
                            the “START/STOP” buttons and release  low speed for a few minutes first.
                            them when the engines start. If the en-  To stop the engines
                            gines do  not start after 5 seconds of  (AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S):
                            cranking, release  the buttons. Wait at  (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                            least 15 seconds before trying to start  neutral position.
                            the engines again. NOTICE: If the start-  (2) Turn the main switch keys to the off po-
                            er motors are engaged continuously   sition.
                            for more than 5 seconds, the start bat-
                            tery will become quickly discharged
                            and it will be impossible to start the
                            engines. The starter motors may also             HORN
                            be damaged if they are engaged con-
                            tinuously for more than 5 seconds.






                                                              TIP:
                                                              The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                                                              the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                                                              (3) Remove  the main switch keys and  the
                                         1                       engine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat
                                                                 will be left unattended.
                        1  “START/STOP” button
                                                              To stop the engines
                        On this boat, the engines are connected di-
                                                              (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD):
                        rectly to the drive units. Starting either engine
                                                              (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                        generates some  thrust immediately. Only
                                                                 neutral position.
                        enough throttle should be applied to keep the
                                                              (2) Push the “START/STOP” buttons.
                        engine at a fast enough idle to stay running.
                        Stopping the engines
                             WARNING
                        Once the engines have stopped, you have
                        NO STEERING CONTROL over  the boat.
                        You could collide with another boat,  a
                        dock, or other obstacle.

                        Stopping the engines immediately after oper-           1
                        ating at  high  engine speeds is  not recom-
                                                              1  “START/STOP” button

                        179]]></page><page Index="189"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 180  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                  Operation


                        TIP:                                     steering wheel to the center position or
                        The engines can also be stopped by pulling  away from the dock. Move the remote
                        the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).      control levers  into the  reverse position
                        (3) Turn the main switch key to the off posi-  and move away from the dock.
                            tion.
                                                              Turning the boat
                                                                  WARNING
                                                               Do not pull the remote control levers
                                                               back to idle when trying to steer away
                                                               from objects — you need throttle to
                                                               steer.
                                                               Be sure passengers are holding on be-
                                                               fore making turns. An unprepared pas-
                                                               senger could lose balance and fall.

                        (4) Remove the main switch key and the en-  Steering control depends on the combination
                            gine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat will  of steering wheel position and the amount of
                            be left unattended.               throttle.
                                                              Water sucked in through the intake grates is
                        Leaving a dock                        pressurized by the impellers in the jet pumps.
                        Because boats steer from the stern, the stern  As the pressurized water is expelled from the
                        first moves in the direction opposite your de-  pumps through the jet thrust nozzles, it cre-
                        sired turn. It is especially important to under-  ates thrust to move and steer the boat. The
                        stand this characteristic when leaving a dock.  higher the engine speed, the more thrust is
                        If you move the remote control levers to the  produced.
                        forward position and simply turn the steering  The amount of jet thrust, in addition to the po-
                        wheel to steer the bow away from the dock,  sition of the steering wheel, determines how
                        as you  would when driving a car out of a  sharply you turn.
                        parking space, you will drive the stern of the  A. More throttle produces high thrust, so
                        boat into the dock.                      the boat will turn more sharply.
                        The following  steps  are basic maneuvering  A
                        techniques which can be used in most cir-
                        cumstances:
                        (1) With the engines idling and the bow still
                            moored to the dock, turn the steering
                            wheel toward the dock. Moving the re-
                            mote control levers into the TDE position
                            or forward position will start to move the
                            stern of the boat away from the dock.
                        (2) When the stern is out a few feet, release
                            the bow  mooring, and then turn  the


                                                                                             180]]></page><page Index="190"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 181  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                        B. Less throttle produces low thrust, so the  are  stopped,  the boat will go straight
                            boat will turn more gradually.       even though the steering wheel is turned.
                                                                 You need throttle to steer.
                         B
                                                              D











                        C. Pulling the remote control levers back to
                            idle or the neutral position produces only
                            minimum  thrust. If  you are traveling  at  Turning left
                            speeds above trolling, you will have rap-
                            idly decreasing ability to steer without
                            throttle. You may still have some turning
                            ability immediately after  pulling the re-
                            mote  control levers back to  idle, but
                            when the engines slow down, the boat
                            will no longer respond to steering wheel
                            input until you apply throttle again or you
                            reach a trolling speed.
                            At trolling speed, the boat can be turned
                            gradually by steering wheel  position  Turning right
                            alone using  just the  amount of thrust
                            available at engine idle.

                         C












                        D. If the boat is moving and the remote con-
                            trol levers are in the neutral position, or if
                            there is no thrust because  the engines


                        181]]></page><page Index="191"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 182  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        Boating with passengers               Stopping the boat
                             WARNING                              WARNING

                        When  passengers  are on board, make   Allow adequate stopping distance.
                        sure they are seated and holding onto the   Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                        handgrips, handrails, or straps before you  member, boats do not have brakes.
                        start to accelerate. An unprepared  pas-   Operate defensively at safe speeds and
                        senger could lose balance and fall.    keep a safe distance away from people,
                                                               objects, and other boats to give you time
                        Your boat is designed for one operator and
                                                               to stop.
                        up to 9 passengers only. Never have more
                                                               Do not shut the engines off when slow-
                        than 10 people in the boat. Passengers must
                                                               ing down in case you need engine power
                        sit in one of the seats and hold onto the hand-
                                                               to steer away from a boat or other ob-
                        grips. Passengers should sit so the weight in
                                                               stacle that comes into your path.
                        the boat is balanced from side-to-side and
                                                               You will lose steering control if you com-
                        bow-to-stern as much as possible. If the pas-
                                                               pletely pull  the  remote control levers
                        senger seat in front of the helm is used, be
                                                               back to idle. You need throttle to steer.
                        sure  the operator’s view ahead is not ob-
                                                               Do not use the reverse function to slow
                        structed.
                                                               down or stop the boat from planing
                          Maximum load (212XE / 212XD):        speed as it could cause you to lose con-
                            Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and  trol, be ejected, or impact the steering
                            passengers:                        wheel or other parts  of  the  boat. This
                              953 kg (2100 lb): ballast is empty  could increase the risk of serious injury.
                              495 kg (1092 lb): ballast is full
                                                              The  boat  is not equipped with a  separate
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                              braking system. It is stopped by water resis-
                            gers:
                                                              tance after the remote control levers  are
                              843 kg (1860 lb): ballast is empty
                                                              moved back to idle. From full speed, the boat
                              386 kg (852 lb): ballast is full
                                                              stops in approximately 105 m (344 ft) for the
                          Maximum load
                                                              AR210 / SX210 or 140 m (459 ft) for the 212 /
                          (except for 212XE / 212XD):
                                                              212S / 212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD after
                            Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                              the remote control levers are moved back to
                            passengers:
                                                              idle. The stopping distance varies depending
                              998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                              on gross  weight,  water surface conditions,
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                              and wind direction. The stated straight-line
                            gers:
                                                              stopping distance should be used for a refer-
                              843 kg (1860 lb)
                                                              ence. The boat slows down as soon as the
                                                              remote control levers are returned to idle but
                                                              will coast for a distance before fully stopping.
                                                              If you are not sure you can stop in time before
                                                              hitting an obstacle, apply throttle and turn in
                                                              another direction.
                                                                                             182]]></page><page Index="192"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 183  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                        AR210 / SX210                         (2) Pull out the stern ladder and  climb up
                                                                 onto the swim platform. (See page 137
                                                                 for information on the stern ladder.)

                             105 m (344 ft)









                        Except for AR210 / SX210

                                                              (3) Return the stern ladder to the stowed po-
                                                                 sition, and then sit in one of the seats
                             140 m (459 ft)
                                                                 provided.
                                                              Boarding from the bow
                                                              A bow ladder is available when boarding from
                                                              the bow of the boat is desired, when the boat
                                                              is beached. (See page 136 for bow ladder us-
                                                              ing procedures.)

                        Boarding from the water               Boarding from a dock or landing jetty
                             WARNING                          (1) Board the boat from the side. One per-
                                                                 son should board at a time by stepping
                        To avoid  severe injury or death, do  not
                                                                 into the boat. Never jump in. Avoid step-
                        board from the rear, use swim platform, or
                                                                 ping  on slick gelcoat  surfaces on the
                        swim behind boat if the engines are run-
                                                                 boat’s gunwales, especially if wet.
                        ning.
                                                              (2) Sit in one of the seats provided and put
                         Severe internal injuries can occur if wa-
                                                                 both feet on the deck.
                          ter is forced into body cavities as a re-
                          sult of being near the jet thrust nozzles.
                                                              Docking
                         Exhaust gases coming from underneath
                                                              (1) Make  sure no obstructions, boats, or
                          the swim platform contain carbon mon-
                                                                 swimmers are close to the boat. Come to
                          oxide, a colorless, odorless gas which
                                                                 a stop before you reach the dock.
                          may cause brain damage or death when
                                                              (2) Notice how wind and water currents are
                          inhaled. Symptoms include nausea, diz-
                                                                 affecting boat movement as you attach
                          ziness, and drowsiness.
                                                                 your mooring lines and fenders.
                        (1) Be sure the  engines are  off,  and then
                            move to the stern of the boat.
                        183]]></page><page Index="193"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 184  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        (3) Approach the dock at idle speed. Use re-  No wind or current:
                            verse as necessary during  slow-speed  Approach the dock at a shallow angle. Se-
                            maneuvering to help control speed and  cure the bow to the dock, and then use en-
                            direction. Position the boat according to  gine thrust or a boat hook to gently move the
                            wind and water conditions. WARNING!  stern to the dock.
                            Do not use your hand, arm, or other
                            parts of your body to try to keep the  To dock using the DRiVE mode (212SD /
                            boat from hitting the dock. You could  212XD):
                            be injured if the boat pushes against  Move the remote control levers to the neutral
                            the dock.                         position, and then activate the DRiVE mode.
                                                              (See page 104.)
                        Wind or current pushing boat away from   Pull the throttle/shift paddle (right) to move
                        dock:                                 the boat forward or pull the throttle/shift pad-
                        Slowly approach the dock at about a 45° an-  dle (left) to move the boat in reverse at a slow
                        gle. Secure the bow to the dock, and then  speed and dock the boat.
                        use engine  thrust  or a boat hook to  gently
                        move the stern to the dock.              1


                                      Wind or current
                                                               2







                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                                                              2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                        Wind or current pushing boat toward
                        dock:                                 Beaching
                        Slowly maneuver to a shallow angle and al-  NOTICE
                        low the boat to move toward the dock.
                                                               Small pebbles, sand, seaweed, and oth-
                                                               er debris can be sucked into the jet in-
                                 Wind or current
                                                               takes and  impair or  damage the
                                                               impellers. Always stop the engines be-
                                                               fore beaching the boat. Be sure the boat
                                                               is in water 90 cm (3 ft) deep from the
                                                               bottom  of the boat  before starting the
                                                               engines again.
                                                               Do not beach the boat on rocky beach-
                                                               es. The hull gelcoat and exposed pump
                                                               housings can be damaged.


                                                                                             184]]></page><page Index="194"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 185  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                         Pay attention to shifts in tides. Beaching  ter. For example, if you are anchoring in
                          at high tide may make it impossible to  10 feet of water, let out 40–60 feet of line.
                          re-launch the boat if the tide recedes.  Secure the line.
                                                              (4) Pull on the line to be sure the anchor is
                        (1) Make sure  no obstructions, boats,  or
                                                                 holding. Also,  periodically check your
                            swimmers are near the beach.
                                                                 boat’s position against the shoreline to
                        (2) Approach the beach slowly and stop the
                                                                 make sure it is not drifting and dragging
                            engines when the water is about 90 cm
                                                                 the anchor. Reset if necessary.
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.
                                                              (5) To pull in (“weigh”) the anchor, start the
                            Remember: turning is  impossible with
                                                                 engines and move forward, keeping ten-
                            the engines stopped.
                                                                 sion on the line as you pull it in. When the
                        (3) Get out of the boat and pull the bow up
                                                                 anchor line is straight up and down, pull
                            on the beach.
                                                                 hard to lift the anchor from the bottom
                        (4) When leaving the beach, push the boat
                                                                 material.
                            out into water that is at least 90 cm (3 ft)
                                                              (6) If the anchor is stuck on the bottom, try
                            deep from the bottom of the boat before
                                                                 this: Let out a few feet of anchor line and
                            starting the engines.
                                                                 secure the line to the boat, again. Slowly
                                                                 maneuver the boat around the  anchor
                        Anchoring
                                                                 until the anchor pulls loose. Keep the line
                             WARNING                             taut during this procedure.
                        Always anchor from the bow. Anchoring
                                                              Crossing wakes and swells
                        from  the stern will  make the boat un-
                                                              You will not always have flat, smooth water.
                        steady. A strong current can pull a stern-
                                                              There will be  swells and wakes  from other
                        anchored boat underwater.
                                                              boats, etc.
                        Select an  anchor appropriate for your boat  The best way to cross wakes and swells is
                        and water conditions. A “Danforth” (or fluke)  with the least jolt to you and the boat. Small
                        type anchor is suitable for most applications;  swells are not as difficult to cross as larger
                        your  Yamaha Boat Dealer can help you  swells or wakes. Crossing a sharp wake gives
                        choose an anchor.                     more of a jolt than a broad swell.
                        (1) Make sure the anchor line is securely tied
                            to the anchor and to the bow eye or a
                            bow cleat.
                        (2) Move the  boat to  the spot where  you
                            want to lower the anchor, heading the        Sharp wakes
                            boat into the wind or current. Stop the
                            boat, and then lower the anchor until it
                            hits bottom.
                        (3) While keeping tension on the line, slowly
                            back up the boat until you have let out      Broad swell
                            line that is 4–6 times the depth of the wa-



                        185]]></page><page Index="195"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 186  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                  Operation

                        To cross a wake or swell, change your speed  Post-operation checks
                        and choose the angle at which you cross the  These post-operation procedures are devel-
                        wake or swell. Usually, a slower speed and  oped to help preserve the long-term appear-
                        “quartering” the wake (crossing at an angle)  ance and reliability of your boat. Perform
                        will reduce the jolt.                 these procedures as soon as possible after
                        Two other things you may notice. The first is  the boat is loaded back on the trailer after the
                        that crossing a group of wakes or swells is  day’s use.
                        not as easy or smooth as crossing just one  Some owners prefer to moor their boat sea-
                        wake. The second is that when you quarter  sonally, rather than keeping it on the trailer
                        the wake or swell, the boat will try to steer  between uses.  Extended mooring  is not
                        away from the wake or swell. When crossing  recommended by Yamaha, but can  be
                        at a 45° angle, you may not notice this, but at  performed if proper precautions are taken
                        a smaller angle, say 10°, it can be very strong.  to help guard against prolonged environ-
                        Be prepared to steer and balance as neces-  mental exposure and  marine  growth.
                        sary.                                 Proper flushing of the cooling system on
                                                              each engine is not possible with the boat in
                            Wake
                                                              the water. In addition, conditions  such  as
                                                              stray electrical voltage in the water, marine
                                                              organisms, and saltwater corrosion can ad-
                                                              versely affect the life of many boat compo-
                                                              nents.  NOTICE: Leaving the  boat in the
                                                              water for extended periods will accelerate
                            90˚
                                                              the rate of normal deterioration of the ex-
                                      45˚                     posed drive components.
                                                10˚           If you do decide to moor your boat, be sure to
                                                              remove it from the water periodically to clean
                                                              the hull and jet pump areas. The frequency of
                                                              maintenance required will depend upon
                                                              whether the water is salt water or fresh water
                                                              and other local water conditions. See your
                                                              dealer for additional  preventative mainte-
                                                              nance recommendations on mooring and/or
                                                              saltwater use for your area.
                                                              (1) After putting the boat on the trailer, flush
                                                                 the cooling system on each  engine to
                                                                 prevent the cooling  system from  clog-
                                                                 ging up with salt, sand, or dirt. Refer to
                                                                 page 192 for the cooling system flushing
                                                                 procedure.
                                                              (2) Drain residual water from the exhaust
                                                                 system by starting the engine, and then


                                                                                             186]]></page><page Index="196"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 187  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Operation

                            alternately pushing the remote control le-  (9) Reinstall the hull drain plug.  NOTICE:
                            ver up to half throttle and back to idle for  Tighten the hull drain  plug  securely
                            10 to 15 seconds. NOTICE: Do not run  before launching the boat. Otherwise,
                            the engine over 4000 r/min on land. Al-  water may flood the boat and cause it
                            so, do not run the  engine for more  to submerge. Clean any foreign mate-
                            than 15 seconds  without supplying   rial, such as dirt or sand, from the
                            water, otherwise, the  engine  could  threads  and the O-ring on the hull
                            overheat and/or seize.               drain plug before installing the drain
                        (3) Stop the engine.                     plug.
                        (4) Wash down the hull, helm, and both jet  (10) Spray a rust inhibitor, such as Yamaha
                            drive units with fresh water.        Silicone Protectant and Lubricant, on
                        (5) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page  metallic parts to minimize corrosion.
                            132 for rear platform hatch opening and  (11) Use a boat cover designed for your boat,
                            closing procedures.)                 or store the boat in a building or under a
                        (6) Remove the access port caps to let any  canopy or carport in order to prevent rain
                            water  drain that  has pooled on  them.  from falling onto the boat. Because all of
                            (See page 214 for access port cap re-  the water will not be drained from the
                            moval and installation procedures.) If the  deck automatically, take sufficient mea-
                            boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,  sures to prevent rainwater from entering
                            leave the caps out until you prepare to  the boat. NOTICE: Make sure that the
                            launch the boat again. If the boat will be  turnbuckles on the boat cover do not
                            transported on the trailer any distance,  contact the boat directly when using
                            temporarily reinstall the caps and close  the cover. Otherwise, the boat could
                            the hatch until you get home. Open the  be damaged.
                            hatch again when you arrive and remove  (12) Turn the battery switch in the rear under-
                            the caps as before. Leave the caps loose  seat storage compartment (port) to the
                            until you plan to transport the boat on the  OFF (red) position. (See page 42 and 42
                            trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-  for more information.)
                            cess port caps out when you are not
                            using or transporting the boat helps
                            keep them from becoming stuck in the
                            access ports.
                        (7) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                            155.)
                        (8) Rinse the engine compartment with a
                            small amount of fresh water. Be careful
                            not to get water on the air filter area or
                            electrical components. Allow any water
                            in the bilge to drain out. After the water
                            has drained, wipe the engine compart-
                            ment and bilge with dry rags.



                        187]]></page><page Index="197"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 188  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                   Trailering

                                Trailering the boat           Use safety chains between the towing vehicle
                                                              and the trailer so the trailer will not detach
                             WARNING
                                                              completely from the towing vehicle if it acci-
                        Avoid accident and injury from improper  dentally comes loose from the hitch ball.
                        trailering:                           Crisscross the chains under the trailer tongue
                         The  trailer must be matched  for  the  so the tongue will not hit the road surface if it
                          boat’s weight and hull.             falls loose. Rig the chains as tightly as possi-
                         The towing vehicle must have the ca-  ble while allowing just enough slack to permit
                          pacity of pulling the load. Pulling a load  tight turns.
                          that exceeds the towing capacity may  Be sure the tongue weight (vertical weight on
                          cause loss of control.              the hitch point) is correct. Generally, 5% to
                         Be sure the boat is secured to the trailer  10% of the combined weight of the boat and
                          and the trailer is properly hitched to the  trailer should be on the tongue. Too much or
                          towing vehicle before towing.       too little weight can cause difficult steering or
                         Read the manuals supplied with the  trailer swaying.
                          trailer by the manufacturer.
                                                              Trailering checklist
                        A trailer is provided as standard equipment
                                                               Check your state laws to be sure your trail-
                        with your boat. If you need to obtain another
                                                               er meets all regulations, such as proper li-
                        trailer, choose one that  is manufactured  to
                                                               censing, brake, axle load, and safety chain
                        carry a boat of the size and weight of your
                                                               requirements.
                        boat. Check the certification label on the left
                                                               Check the trailer for any loose fasteners or
                        forward side of the trailer. This label  is  re-
                                                               damaged parts.
                        quired to show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
                                                               Check the tires for proper inflation.
                        ing (GVWR), which is the load carrying
                                                               Check the wheel bearings and wheel lug
                        capacity of the trailer plus the trailer’s weight.
                                                               nuts before each trip.
                        Be sure that the total weight of your boat, any
                                                               Check the tail, brake, and turn signal lights
                        cargo, and the trailer weight itself does not
                                                               for proper operation.
                        exceed the GVWR.
                        Hitch
                        The trailer hitch ball must match the size of
                        the socket on the trailer hitch coupler. Hitch-
                        es are divided into classes that specify the
                        Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and the maxi-
                        mum tongue weight. Always use a hitch rated
                        for the same or higher class. Use a bolted-on
                        or welded-on hitch; clamp-on bumper hitch-
                        es are not recommended. Be sure the trailer
                        hitch’s release handle is latched with the lock
                        pin installed before towing.



                                                                                             188]]></page><page Index="198"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 189  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trailering

                         Secure the bow of the boat to the trailer   Be sure any cargo that must be carried in
                          with the winch line and also with the chain.  the boat as well as the folding windshield
                          Secure the stern eyes to the trailer with tie-  and all hatches are  secured. A durable,
                          downs.                               properly fitting cover, such as the genuine
                                                               Yamaha cover available from your Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer designed specifically for your
                                                               boat, is highly recommended to help pro-
                                                               tect your boat  during  transport and stor-
                                                               age.
                                                               Carry a spare tire for the trailer, along with
                                                               sufficient tools to change the tire.
                                                               While traveling, check the wheel hubs on
                                              1                the trailer whenever you park. If a hub feels
                                                               abnormally hot, have the bearing inspected
                                                               before continuing your trip. On longer trips,
                        1  Bow eye
                                                               it is a good idea to carry a set of spare
                                                               wheel bearings, seals, and races.
                                                               When making a turn, do not cut corners.
                                                               The trailer has a smaller turning circle, so it
                                                               turns more sharply around the corner than
                                                               the towing vehicle.

                                                              Backing your trailer
                                                              It takes practice to back a trailer successfully.
                           1                           1      If you are not familiar backing up with a trailer,
                                                              practice first in an open area away from ob-
                        1  Stern eye
                                                              stacles.
                         Take down and store  the  bimini top,  if
                          used. The bimini top is not designed to stay
                          unsecured on the boat at highway speeds.
                          (See page 144 or 148.)
                        TIP:
                        During transport, use a boat cover to prevent
                        any items from blowing out of the boat, or
                        make sure to store any items inside the stor-
                        age compartments and securely close the
                        compartments.
                         Be sure the access port caps are properly
                          installed (see page 214 for more informa-
                          tion) and the rear platform hatch is closed
                          securely.


                        189]]></page><page Index="199"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 190  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                   Trailering

                        Keep the following points in mind when   sible, have a second person stand aside
                        backing up                               as an observer. Stop when  the wheels
                         Back slowly. Make steering adjustments in  are at least halfway submerged. Set the
                          small steps.                           parking brake.
                         Turn the towing vehicle’s wheels opposite  (5) Remove the bow line from the bow eye.
                          the direction you want the trailer to go.  (6) Back the trailer farther into the water until
                         After the trailer begins moving, turn the  just the tops of the  fenders  show, and
                          towing vehicle to follow it.           then reset the parking brake. Board the
                         Have a second person stand by to help di-  boat and start it. If possible, remain on
                          rect you with hand signals.            the trailer until the engines are warm and
                                                                 are responding to throttle.
                        Launching                             (7) Back the boat out into the water, watch-
                        As a courtesy to other boaters, prepare your  ing carefully for people, other boats, or
                        boat for launching before using the ramp.  obstacles.
                        Each launch may have particular differences,
                        such as ramp angle, prevailing wind, waves,  Loading
                        and water currents. If possible, watch a cou-  (1) Disconnect the trailer  lights from the
                        ple of boaters launch their boats first to notice  towing vehicle.
                        any problems. While every boater develops a  (2) Back the trailer down the ramp as close
                        preferred launch procedure, here is a recom-  to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-
                        mended general procedure:                sible, have a second person act as an
                                                                 observer while standing to the side of the
                                                                 trailer. Stop when the tops of the trailer’s
                                                                 fenders are  about  3 inches above  the
                                                                 waterline.
                                                              (3) With the boat moving at the slowest idle
                                                                 speed, guide the boat onto the support
                                                                 rails. Use throttle only if necessary for
                                                                 steering ability.  WARNING! Using too
                                                                 much throttle  can cause the boat to
                                                                 jump  over the front of  the trailer,
                        (1) Perform the pre-operation checks     which can result in injury to the boat
                            shown on page 160 that can be per-   operator and bystanders.
                            formed on land.                   (4) Make sure the boat is centered on the
                        (2) Remove all trailering tie-down lines from  support rails and is headed straight for
                            the boat and attach your docking lines  the bow stop (bumper board). Ease the
                            and fenders, if used.                boat forward until the bow rests against
                        (3) Disconnect the trailer  lights  from the  the bow stop. NOTICE: The winch line
                            towing vehicle.                      is not designed to pull the boat onto
                        (4) Back the trailer down the ramp as close  the trailer.
                            to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-



                                                                                             190]]></page><page Index="200"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 191  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trailering

                        (5) Attach and  tighten the  winch line.  Lifting
                            NOTICE: The winch line should not be  NOTICE
                            the only line securing the bow during
                            trailering. Use the chain along with the  Do not attach lifting cables to the bow eye,
                            winch to secure the boat to the trailer.  cleats, stern eyes, ski tow hook, or hand-
                                                              grips. Serious damage to the boat can oc-
                                                              cur. Use only a sling designed specifically
                                                              for lifting boats.
                                                              If you need to remove the boat from the water
                                                              without a trailer, use these guidelines:
                                                               Use a sling-type lifting  mechanism  de-
                                                               signed for lifting boats. The sling should be
                                                               covered with a protective material to pre-
                                              1                vent damage to the hull gelcoat.
                                                               Use spreader bars to avoid side stress to
                        1  Bow eye                             the hull that may cause cracks in the gel-
                                                               coat and fiberglass.
                        (6) Pull the trailer up the ramp out of the way   Attach guidelines to the bow eye and stern
                            of other boaters. Attach the bow and  eyes to control movement of the boat dur-
                            stern tie-downs. Reconnect the trailer  ing lifting.
                            lights.                            Remove all people and all cargo from the
                                                               boat. Drain any excess water from the bilge
                                                               using the bilge pump.
                                                               Be sure all people are standing clear, and
                                                               then lift the boat slowly and just far enough
                                                               to verify that the boat is securely held and
                                                               properly balanced. If necessary, lower the
                                                               boat again and adjust the slings.
                                                               When ready, lift the boat slowly and care-
                                                               fully.
                           1                           1

                        1  Stern eye
                        (7) Perform the post-operation checks  on
                            page 186.











                        191]]></page><page Index="201"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 192  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                               Post-operation care
                        Flushing the cooling system
                        Cooling system flushing is essential to pre-
                        vent the cooling system from  clogging up
                        with salt, sand, or dirt.
                        (1) Connect the garden hose adapter to a
                            garden hose.


                                1                2
                                                                   1
                                                                                     3


                                                                            2

                                                              1  Flush hose connector
                                                              2  Flush hose connector cap
                                                              3  Garden hose adapter
                        1  Garden hose adapter
                        2  Garden hose
                                                              (3) Connect the garden hose to a water tap.
                                                              (4) Make sure that the area around the boat
                        (2) Loosen the flush hose connector cap for
                                                                 is clear, and then start the engine. Imme-
                            the engine you are going to flush and re-
                                                                 diately after the engine starts, fully turn
                            move it. Insert the garden hose adapter
                                                                 the water supply on so that water flows
                            into the flush hose connector by pushing
                                                                 out continually from the jet thrust nozzle
                            and twisting it until it is securely connect-  and cooling water pilot outlet. NOTICE:
                            ed.
                                                                 Never turn on the water before start-
                                                                 ing the engine. The water could flow
                                                                 back through the muffler into the
                                                                 crankcase causing  severe engine
                                                                 damage. Be sure to turn on the water
                                                                 immediately after starting the engine
                                                                 to prevent engine overheating.
                                                              (5) Run the engine at a fast idle for 3 to 5
                                                                 minutes. If the engine stops while flush-
                                                                 ing, turn the water supply off immediately
                                                                 and perform  the procedure  again from
                                                                 step 4.
                                                              (6) Turn off the water supply, and then drain
                                                                 residual water from the exhaust system
                                                                 by alternately pushing the remote control



                                                                                             192]]></page><page Index="202"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 193  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Care and storage

                            lever up to half throttle and back to idle
                            for 10 to 15 seconds.
                        (7) Stop the engine. NOTICE: Never have
                            the water on when the engine is not
                            running.  The water could flow  back
                            through the muffler into the crankcase
                            causing severe engine damage. Do
                            not run the engine for more than 15
                            seconds  after the water supply  has                       1
                            been turned off to avoid engine over-
                            heating.                          1  Hull drain plug
                        (8) Remove the garden hose adapter.
                        (9) Install and tighten the cap securely.  (2) Clean the hull, boat interior, and  drive
                        (10) Repeat the flushing procedure for the  units with Yamaclean Wash & Wax Con-
                            other engine.                        centrate, or a mild natural soap, and wa-
                                                                 ter. Rinse with fresh water. Scum on the
                        Cleaning the boat                        hull can be removed with Yamaclean Hull
                             WARNING                             Cleaner™. NOTICE: Incorrect cleaning
                                                                 can damage  vinyl. See “Basic stain
                        Gasoline and its vapors are highly flamma-
                                                                 guide” on page 195.
                        ble and explosive. If there is fuel or a fu-
                                                              (3) Clean the engine and bilge areas with
                        el/water  mixture   in  the   engine
                                                                 Yamaclean Bilge Cleaner™ or an equiv-
                        compartment, wipe it up immediately with
                                                                 alent and rinse with fresh water. Drain all
                        dry rags. Do not operate the boat until the
                                                                 water and wipe up any remaining mois-
                        source of the fuel leak is found and cor-
                                                                 ture with clean, dry rags.  NOTICE: Be
                        rected.
                                                                 careful not to get water on the air filter
                                                                 area or electrical components. Do not
                        TIP:
                                       ®
                        Quality Yamaclean , Yamashield™, and oth-  use high-pressure water when rinsing
                                                                 the engine or engine compartment as
                        er Yamalube care products are available from
                                                                 severe engine damage could result.
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                              (4) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        (1) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                                                                 132 for rear platform hatch opening and
                            155 for hull drain plug removal and instal-
                                                                 closing procedures.)
                            lation procedures.)
                                                              (5) Remove the access port caps to let any
                                                                 water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                                                                 (See page 214 for access port cap re-
                                                                 moval and installation procedures.) If the
                                                                 boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                                                                 leave the caps out until you prepare to
                                                                 launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                                                                 transported on the trailer any distance,
                        193]]></page><page Index="203"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 194  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                            temporarily reinstall the caps and close  tant” products on the market can ac-
                            the hatch until you get home. Open the  tually damage vinyl over time. Consult
                            hatch again when you arrive and remove  a Yamaha Boat Dealer if you want to
                            the caps as before. Leave the caps loose  use a product other than Yamaclean
                            until you plan to transport the boat on the  Vinyl Protectant.
                            trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-  (10) Vacuum and hose-off the  carpeting as
                            cess port caps out when you are not  necessary. If  needed, use Yamaclean
                                                                             ®
                            using or transporting the boat helps  Carpet Cleaner  or other quality brand-
                            keep them from becoming stuck in the  name carpet cleaner product to clean
                            access ports. (See page 214 for more  soiled areas. Roll up the carpet face out
                            information.)                        for storage.  NOTICE: Always dry the
                        (6) Securely install  the hull drain plug by  carpet face up. Never roll up the car-
                            tightening it until it stops. NOTICE: Be-  pet while wet. Never fold the carpet.
                            fore installing the hull drain plug, clean  (11) Wash the fabric of the bimini top with a
                            the drain plug threads and O-ring to  mild natural  soap in lukewarm water,
                            remove any foreign materials, such as  then rinse. Do not use detergents. Allow
                            dirt or sand. Otherwise, the hull drain  to air dry thoroughly before storage.
                            plug could be damaged, allowing wa-
                            ter to enter the hull. Check the O-ring
                            on the hull drain plug and make sure
                            that the hull drain plug is tightened se-
                            curely before launching the boat. Oth-
                            erwise, water may flood the boat and
                            cause it to submerge.
                        (7) Spray the exterior of  the engines with
                            Yamalube Silicone Protectant  &  Lubri-
                            cant, or an equivalent. For areas requir-
                            ing heavy protection, use Yamashield™.
                        (8) Wax the hull  with Yamaclean  Spray
                               ®
                            Wax  or other non-abrasive wax de-
                            signed  for marine gelcoat.  WARNING!
                            Slippery surfaces can cause falls and
                            injury. Be careful not  to  apply too
                            much wax on deck and gunwale step-
                            ping surfaces.  This will  make them
                            slippery.
                        (9) Wipe  all vinyl and  rubber components,
                            such as the seats and engine compart-
                            ment seals, with Yamaclean Vinyl Dress-
                            ing™ or other quality vinyl protectant.
                            NOTICE: Some well-known “protec-



                                                                                             194]]></page><page Index="204"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 195  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Care and storage

                        Basic stain guide
                        Here are basic steps to remove common stains from boat upholstery. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or upholstery-cleaning professional for difficult stains.

                         TYPE OF STAIN                 STEPS
                                                       (rinse with clean, warm water and then dry after application)
                                                             1             2             3
                         General care/Dirt                   A             B             —
                         Chewing gum                         E             A             —
                         Coffee/Tea/Chocolate                B             —             —
                         Grease                              E             B             —
                         Ink*                                C             F             D
                         Ketchup                             A             B             —
                         Lipstick                            C             B             A
                         Mustard                             A             B             C
                         Mildew/Wet leaves*                  C             B             A
                         Motor oil                           B             —             —
                         Permanent marker*                   C             F             D
                         Suntan lotion*                      A             B             —
                         Tar/Asphalt                         E             B             —
                        * May cause permanent staining.
                               A       Medium-soft brush with warm, soapy water
                               B       Yamaclean All Purpose Cleaner or equivalent
                               C       Isopropyl alcohol (91% is best)
                                       Mixture of 1 tablespoon (15 ml) ammonia, 1/4 cup (60 ml) hydrogen peroxide, and
                               D
                                       3/4 cup (177 ml) water
                               E       Wipe or scrape off excess (chill gum with ice first)
                               F       Name brand ink remover



















                        195]]></page><page Index="205"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 196  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Battery care (AR210 / SX210)
                        If the boat will not be used for more than a
                        month, remove the battery and store it in a
                        cool, dark place.                                   1   2   3
                        The battery is located in the rear underseat
                        storage compartment (port).
                        To remove the battery:
                        (1) Turn the battery switch to the OFF (red)
                            position. (See page 42.)            4
                        (2) Remove the battery cover by removing
                            the nuts.                         1  Negative (–) battery lead (black)
                                                              2  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                                                       2
                           1                                  3  Battery strap
                                                              4  Ground lead (black)

                                                              To store the battery:
                                                              (1) Clean the battery casing and terminals
                                                                 using a mixture of baking soda and water
                                                                 (one tablespoon of baking soda to one
                                                                 cup of water).
                                                              (2) Apply dielectric grease or petroleum jelly
                                                                 to the  battery terminals and to all ex-
                        1  Nut
                                                                 posed connectors.
                        2  Battery cover
                                                              (3) If the battery will be stored for a longer
                        (3) Disconnect the ground lead (black), the  period, check its state of charge (use a
                            negative (–) battery leads (black).  hydrometer or a voltmeter and load tes-
                        (4) Disconnect the positive (+) battery lead  ter) at least once a month and recharge
                            (red).                               the battery if it gets too low.
                        (5) Unfasten the battery strap, and then re-  To charge the battery:
                            move the battery from the boat.   (1) Remove the caps from the cells. Add dis-
                                                                 tilled  water if necessary  to top up  the
                                                                 electrolyte to the proper level.
                                                              (2) Follow  the battery manufacturer’s  in-
                                                                 structions for charging.  WARNING!
                                                                 When charging a battery, keep it well
                                                                 away from sparks and open flames, as
                                                                 it gives off explosive gases. When us-
                                                                 ing a battery charger, connect the bat-
                                                                 tery to the charger before you turn on
                                                                 the charger. This will prevent sparking




                                                                                             196]]></page><page Index="206"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 197  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Care and storage

                            at the terminals that could ignite bat-  Battery care
                            tery gases.                       (except for AR210 / SX210)
                        To install the battery:               If the boat will not be used for more than a
                        (1) Place the battery  in  the battery holder,  month, remove the battery and store it in a
                            and then fasten the battery using the bat-  cool, dark place.
                            tery strap.                       The battery is located in the rear underseat
                        (2) Connect the positive (+) battery lead (red)  storage compartment (port).
                            to the  positive (+) battery terminal.  To remove the battery:
                            NOTICE: Reversal of the battery leads  (1) Turn the battery switch to the OFF (red)
                            will damage the electrical parts.    position. (See page 42.)
                        (3) Connect the  negative (–)  battery lead  (2) Remove  the battery cove by removing
                            (black) and the ground lead (black) to the  the nuts.
                            negative (–) battery terminal.
                        (4) Make sure that the battery is securely  1                       2
                            held in place.
                        (5) Install the battery cover by installing the
                            nuts.








                                                              1  Nut
                                                              2  Battery cover

                                                              (3) Disconnect the ground lead (black), the
                                                                 negative (–) battery lead (black), and the
                                                                 negative (–) amplifier lead (black) (212SE /
                                                                 212SD).
                                                              (4) Disconnect the positive (+) battery lead
                                                                 (red)  and the positive  (+) amplifier lead
                                                                 (red) (212SE / 212SD).
                                                              (5) Unfasten the battery strap, and then re-
                                                                 move the battery from the boat.













                        197]]></page><page Index="207"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 198  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Care and storage

                                                                 tery to the charger before you turn on
                                                                 the charger. This will prevent sparking
                                            3   5  6 3           at the terminals that could ignite bat-
                                    1                            tery gases.
                                                              To install the battery:
                                 2                            (1) Place the battery in  the battery holder,
                                                  4
                                                                 and then fasten the battery using the bat-
                                                                 tery strap.
                                                              (2) Connect  the positive (+)  amplifier lead
                                                                 (red) (212SE / 212SD) and the positive (+)
                                                                 battery lead (red) to the positive (+) bat-
                        1  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                        2  Negative (–) battery lead (black)     tery terminal. NOTICE: Reversal of the
                        3  Battery strap                         battery leads will damage the electri-
                        4  Ground lead (black)                   cal parts.
                        5  Positive (+) amplifier lead (red) (212SE /   (3) Connect the negative (–)  amplifier lead
                           212SD)
                                                                 (black) (212SE / 212SD) and the negative
                        6  Negative (–) amplifier lead (black) (212SE /
                           212SD)                                (–) battery lead (black), and the ground
                                                                 lead (black) to the negative (–) battery ter-
                        To store the battery:                    minal.
                        (1) Clean the battery casing and terminals  (4) Make sure that the battery is securely
                            using a mixture of baking soda and water  held in place.
                            (one tablespoon of baking soda to one  (5) Install the battery cover by installing the
                            cup of water).                       nuts.
                        (2) Apply dielectric grease or petroleum jelly
                            to the battery terminals  and to all  ex-
                            posed connectors.
                        (3) If the battery will be stored for a longer
                            period, check its state of charge (use a
                            hydrometer or a voltmeter and load tes-
                            ter) at least once a month and recharge
                            the battery if it gets too low.
                        To charge the battery:
                        (1) Remove the caps from the cells. Add dis-
                            tilled  water if necessary  to top up the
                            electrolyte to the proper level.
                        (2) Follow the  battery manufacturer’s  in-
                            structions for charging.  WARNING!
                            When charging a battery, keep it well
                            away from sparks and open flames, as
                            it gives off explosive gases. When us-
                            ing a battery charger, connect the bat-


                                                                                             198]]></page><page Index="208"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 199  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Care and storage

                               Long-term storage
                                                                Recommended water-resistant grease:
                        Storing your boat  for prolonged periods of
                                                                  YAMALUBE  MARINE GREASE or
                        time, such as winter storage, requires pre-
                                                                  Yamaha Grease A
                        ventative maintenance to ensure against de-
                        terioration. It is advisable to have  the  boat
                        serviced by an  authorized Yamaha Boat   Throttle cables
                        Dealer before storage. However, the follow-  Grease the throttle-cable inner wires at the
                        ing procedures can be performed by the  pulley wheel of each APS.
                        owner with a minimum of tools.        AR210 / SX210

                        Fuel system
                        Fill the fuel tank with fresh fuel, adding one
                        ounce of Fuel Med RX, available from your
                        Yamaha Boat Dealer, to each gallon of fuel or
                        use an equivalent according to the manufac-
                        ture’s instructions. (See page 150 for infor-
                        mation on filling the fuel tank.) Do not “top
                        off” the tank, because fuel could spill. A full
                        fuel tank is less likely to allow condensation
                        to collect in the tank, reducing the chance of  Except for AR210 / SX210
                        contaminated fuel. Running the engines with
                        treated fuel during  cooling system flushing
                        will also help protect the fuel system.
                        TIP:
                        Use of Fuel Med RX eliminates the need to
                        drain the fuel system. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or other qualified mechanic if the fuel
                        system is to be drained instead.

                        Lubrication
                        It is advisable to take the boat to a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer to have the engines fogged for   Steering cable ball joints and inner wires
                        long-term storage.                    Grease the steering cable and shift cable ball
                                                              joints at the jet thrust nozzles.  Extend  the
                        Grease points                         steering cable and shift cable inner wires and
                        To  keep  moving parts sliding or rotating  apply a thin coat of grease to them.
                        smoothly, coat them with water-resistant
                        grease.







                        199]]></page><page Index="209"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 200  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Care and storage


                                                                Grease capacity:
                                                                  6.0–8.0 cc (0.20–0.27 oz)


                                                              AR210 / SX210
                                                                            1






                         Pivot points
                        Grease all pivot points  of the  steering and
                        shift mechanisms at the pump ends.

                                                              1  Bearing housing grease nipple

                                                              Except for AR210 / SX210




                                                                          1





                         Bearing housings
                        Grease  the bearing housings through the
                        grease nipples.  NOTICE: Fill the grease  1  Bearing housing grease nipple
                        slowly and carefully, because it can dam-
                        age the hoses and the joints.
                        The  first service should be  done after 10
                        hours or 1 month by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        Fill the bearing housings with water-resistant
                        grease through the grease nipples.
                          Grease capacity:
                            33.0–35.0 cc (1.11–1.18 oz)
                        After  first service:  Every  100 hours or 6
                        months (you may do this yourself).




                                                                                             200]]></page><page Index="210"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 201  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Maintenance

                                   Maintenance                Removing and installing the engine
                                                              covers (except for AR210 / SX210)
                             WARNING
                                                              The engine cover of each engine is remov-
                        Be sure to turn off the engines when you  able.
                        perform maintenance  unless otherwise  To remove the engine cover:
                        specified. If you are not familiar with ma-  (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 126.)
                        chine servicing, this work should be done  (2) Remove the engine cover screws.
                        by a Yamaha Boat Dealer or other quali-
                        fied mechanic.

                        Maintenance, replacement, or repair of  the   1
                        emission control devices and system may be
                        performed by any marine SI engine repair es-
                        tablishment or individual. Warranty repair,
                        however, must be performed at an autho-
                        rized Yamaha Boat Dealer. A service manual
                        is available for purchase through a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer for owners  who have the me-
                        chanical skills, tools, and other equipment  1  Engine cover screw
                        necessary to perform maintenance not cov-
                                                              (3) Lift up the engine cover and remove it.
                        ered by this owner’s/operator’s manual.

                        Owner’s/operator’s manual
                                                                     1
                        It is advisable to always carry the own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual with  you whenever
                        you use the boat.
                        To protect these materials from water dam-
                        age, it would be a good idea to put them in a
                        waterproof bag. If  your owner’s/operator’s
                        manual is damaged, order a replacement
                        from a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        The service information included in this man-  1  Engine cover
                        ual is intended to provide you, the owner,
                        with the necessary information for complet-
                        ing  your own preventive  maintenance and
                        minor repairs.











                        201]]></page><page Index="211"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 202  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                             Maintenance

                        To install the engine cover:
                        (1) Place the engine cover in its original po-
                            sition, and then push it down.

















                        (2) Install the engine cover screws.
                        (3) Close the engine hood.








































                                                                                             202]]></page><page Index="212"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 203  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Maintenance

                        Periodic maintenance chart
                        The periodic maintenance chart gives general guidelines for periodic maintenance. Have a
                        Yamaha dealer perform the checks in the following chart. However, maintenance may need
                        to be performed more frequently depending on your operating conditions. If you have any
                        questions, consult a Yamaha dealer.
                        This “√” mark indicates items to be checked and serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Fuel hoses, clamps,   Check for damage, and check con-
                         canister, and check   nections and tightening of clamps      √
                         valve
                                           Check cap for damage, and check
                         Fuel filler cap                                              √
                                           seal for cracks and deformation
                         Fuel tank         Check installation            √            √
                         Main switches and
                         engine shut-off   Check operation               √            √
                         switch
                         Battery
                         (AR210 / SX210)   Check state of charge and termi-
                         Batteries         nals, and check for broken battery         √
                         (except for AR210 /   straps
                         SX210)
                         Battery leads     Check terminals                            √
                         Battery switch
                         (AR210 / SX210)
                         Battery switches   Check operation              √            √
                         (except for AR210 /
                         SX210)
                         Meters            Check lighting                √            √
                         Neutral switches   Check operation              √            √
                         Hatch interlock
                         switches (wet stor-  Check operation            √            √
                         age compartment)
                         Blowers           Check operation               √            √
                         Horn              Check operation               √            √
                         Navigation lights  Check lighting               √            √
                                           Check for water discharge by auto-
                                           matic operation, clean filter, check
                         Electric bilge pump                                          √
                                           hoses for damage, and check tight-
                                           ening of clamps
                         Other electrical com-  Check operation of stereo, and oth-  √  √
                         ponents           er components


                        203]]></page><page Index="213"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 204  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                             Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Steering master   Check operation and tilting mecha-  √      √
                         ASSY              nism, and check for looseness
                                           Check hydraulic fluid level, and
                         Steering system   check for dirt in fluid
                         (hydraulic system)   Check for hydraulic fluid leakage,   √  √
                         (212SD / 212XD)   and check parts for wear and dam-
                                           age
                                           Check operation from steering mas-
                         Steering system   ter ASSY to jet thrust nozzles, and   √    √
                         (212SD / 212XD)   check for free play
                                           Check jet pumps for corrosion
                         Steering system   Check connections of connectors,
                         (electrical system)   and check for looseness   √            √
                         (212SD / 212XD)
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Steering cables                                              √
                                           and lubricate
                                           Check operation, and check link rod
                         Articulating keel                                            √
                                           for bends and damage
                                           Check exterior and operation,
                         Remote control le-                              √            √
                         vers              check shift operation, and check for
                                           looseness
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Throttle cables                                              √
                                           and lubricate
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Shift cables                                                 √
                                           and lubricate (shift gate end)
                         Throttle/shift pad-  Check operation            √            √
                         dles (212SD / 212XD)
                         Exhaust hoses, wa-  Check for exhaust leakage, and
                         ter locks, and resona-  check clamps at connections          √
                         tors
                         Drain passages    Remove clogs                               √
                         Drain plugs       Check O-rings                 √            √
                         Hull and deck     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check installation and operation,
                         Windshield and seats                            √            √
                                           and check for damage
                         Wakeboard tower   Check installation, and check for
                         (except for SX210 /   damage                    √            √
                         212) and bimini top
                         Hatches, hinges, and   Check installation       √            √
                         packing seals



                                                                                             204]]></page><page Index="214"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 205  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Ladders (bow and   Check installation           √            √
                         stern)
                         Access port caps  Check exterior and installation            √
                         Spark plugs       Check                         √            √
                         High-pressure fuel   Check connections and exterior,         √
                         hoses             and check for leakage
                         Engine oil        Replace                       √            √
                         (AR210 / SX210)
                         Engine oil
                         (except for AR210 /   Replace                   √     √      √
                         SX210)
                         Engine oil filters  Replace                                  √
                         Air filter elements  Check for damage and dirt               √
                         Intake hoses and   Check for damage, and check con-          √
                         breather hoses    nections
                         Throttle bodies   Lubricate throttle valves                  √
                         Anodes (engines)  Check for corrosion                              √ *2
                         Valve clearance   Check and adjust                                 √ *2
                         Rubber couplings  Check for looseness and noise                     √
                         Engine mounts     Check for damage and peeling                      √
                         Cooling water hoses   Check for damage, and check con-
                         and cooling water pi-  nections                                     √
                         lot outlet hoses
                         Water inlet strainers  Check for damage         √            √
                         Intake grates     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check for bends, damage, and for-
                         Impellers                                       √            √
                                           eign material
                         Impeller ducts    Check and lubricate                        √
                                           Check for damage and lubricate
                         Drive shaft spline                                                  √
                                           splines
                                           Check bearings and grease condi-
                         Jet pump bearings                                                   √
                                           tion
                         Jet thrust nozzles  Check movement, and lubricate            √
                         Intermediate hous-  Lubricate                                √
                         ings







                        205]]></page><page Index="215"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 206  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                             Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Anodes (jet pump   Check for corrosion                       √
                         units)
                        *1: Whichever comes first.
                        *2: Check every 200 hours.
                        Perform the pre-operation checks and  post-operation checks  before  performing  periodic
                        maintenance.














































                                                                                             206]]></page><page Index="216"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 207  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Specifications

                                           Specifications (AR210 / SX210)

                                        ITEM                              Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board:            10
                         Maximum load capacity:              998 kg (2200 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length:                             6460 mm (254.3 in)
                         Beam:                               2580 mm (101.6 in)
                         Height:                             2780 mm (109.5 in) (AR210)
                                                             1780 mm (70.1 in) (SX210)
                         Draft:                              430 mm (16.9 in)
                         Dry weight:                         1464 kg (3228 lb) (AR210)
                                                             1439 kg (3172 lb) (SX210)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine):  33.0 L/h (8.7 US gal/h, 7.3 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle:    2.87 hour
                         Trolling speed:                     1500 ±100 r/min
                         Engine
                         Number of engines:                  2
                         Engine type:                        Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders:                3
                         Engine displacement:                1049 cm³
                         Bore × stroke:                      82.0 × 66.2 mm (3.23 × 2.61 in)
                         Compression ratio:                  11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold):      0.15–0.22 mm (0.0059–0.0087 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold):     0.26–0.32 mm (0.0102–0.0126 in)
                         Lubrication system:                 Dry sump
                         Cooling system:                     Water
                         Starting system:                    Electric
                         Ignition system:                    T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK):                   CR9EB
                         Spark plug gap:                     0.7–0.8 mm (0.028–0.031 in)
                         Battery capacity:                   12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system:                    Flywheel magneto












                        207]]></page><page Index="217"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 208  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                            Specifications


                                        ITEM                              Specification
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system:                  Jet pump
                         Jet pump type:                      Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation:                  Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle:                        11.2°
                         Transmission:                       Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle:            23+23°
                         Jet thrust nozzle trim angle        3°
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel:                   Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON):        86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON):        90
                         Fuel tank total capacity:           189 L (50.0 US gal, 41.6 Imp.gal)
                                                             YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil

                         Recommended engine oil:


                         Recommended engine oil type SAE:    SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API:   API SG, SH, SJ, SL
                         Engine oil total quantity:          3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement:  3.4 L (3.59 US qt, 2.99 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement:  3.2 L (3.38 US qt, 2.82 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Battery fuse:                       30 A
                         Main fuse:                          20 A
                         Main relay drive fuse:              10 A
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse:     10 A
                         Accessory fuse:                     20 A
                         Fuel pump fuse:                     10 A


















                                                                                             208]]></page><page Index="218"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 209  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Specifications

                                     Specifications (except for AR210 / SX210)

                                        ITEM                              Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board:            10
                         Maximum load capacity:              953 kg (2100 lb) (212XE / 212XD)
                                                             998 kg (2200 lb) (212 / 212S / 212SE / 212SD)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length:                             6460 mm (254.3 in)
                         Beam:                               2580 mm (101.6 in)
                                                             2730 mm (107.5 in) (212S / 212SE / 212SD /
                         Height:
                                                             212XE / 212XD)
                                                             1780 mm (70.1 in) (212)
                         Draft:                              520 mm (20.5 in) (212 / 212S)
                                                             530 mm (20.9 in) (212SE / 212SD / 212XE /
                                                             212XD)
                         Dry weight:                         1675 kg (3693 lb) (3-star models [212XD])
                                                             1707 kg (3763 lb) (3-star models [212XE])
                                                             1717 kg (3785 lb) (4-star models [212XE])
                                                             1657 kg (3653 lb) (3-star models [212SD])
                                                             1699 kg (3746 lb) (3-star models [212SE])
                                                             1709 kg (3768 lb) (4-star models [212SE])
                                                             1632 kg (3598 lb) (3-star models [212S])
                                                             1642 kg (3620 lb) (4-star models [212S])
                                                             1581 kg (3486 lb) (3-star models [212])
                         Performance
                                                             49.7 L/h (13.1 US gal/h, 10.9 Imp.gal/h) (3-star
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine):
                                                             models)
                                                             43.8 L/h (11.5 US gal/h, 9.6 Imp.gal/h) (4-star
                                                             models)
                         Cruising range at full throttle:    1.90 hour (3-star models)
                                                             2.16 hour (4-star models)
                         Trolling speed:                     1300 ± 100 r/min
















                        209]]></page><page Index="219"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 210  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                            Specifications


                                        ITEM                              Specification
                         Engine
                         Number of engines:                  2
                         Engine type:                        Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders:                4
                         Engine displacement:                1812 cm³
                         Bore × stroke:                      86.0 × 78.0 mm (3.39 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio:                  11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold):      0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold):     0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system:                 Wet sump
                         Cooling system:                     Water
                         Starting system:                    Electric
                         Ignition system:                    T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK):                   LFR6A (212 / 212S / 212XE [4-star models])
                                                             LFR7A (212XD / 212XE [3-star models] / 212SD /
                                                             212SE [3-star models])
                         Spark plug gap:                     0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity:                   12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system:                    Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system:                  Jet pump
                         Jet pump type:                      Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation:                  Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle:                        14.7°
                         Transmission:                       Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle:            23+23°
                         Jet thrust nozzle trim angle        3°






















                                                                                             210]]></page><page Index="220"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 211  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Specifications


                                        ITEM                              Specification
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel:                   Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON):        86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON):        90
                         Fuel tank total capacity:           189 L (50.0 US gal, 41.6 Imp.gal)
                                                             YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil

                         Recommended engine oil:


                         Recommended engine oil type SAE:    SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                                                             3-star models
                         Recommended engine oil grade API:
                                                             API SG, SH, SJ, SL
                                                             4-star models
                                                             API SJ, SL
                         Engine oil total quantity:          5.3 L (5.60 US qt, 4.66 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement:  3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement:  3.5 L (3.70 US qt, 3.08 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Battery fuse:                       30 A (212 / 212S / 212SE [4-star models])
                         Main fuse:                          20 A
                         BCU (SCU) fuse:                     50 A (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD)
                         Main relay drive fuse:              10 A
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse:     10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse:                     10 A


























                        211]]></page><page Index="221"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 212  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                   Troubleshooting
                        If you have any trouble with your boat, use this section to check for the possible cause. If you
                        cannot find the cause or if the procedure for replacement or repair is not described in this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, ask your Yamaha Boat Dealer or a qualified mechanic for the proper
                        service.

                        Troubleshooting chart
                        The Troubleshooting  chart contains:  “TROUBLE,” “POSSIBLE  CAUSE,” “REMEDY,” and
                        “PAGE.”
                        Check the possible cause and remedy, and also the referred page for the maintenance steps
                        to solve the trouble.
                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor does not   switch (212SD /   place     switch                   41
                         turn over   212XD)
                                     Fuse          Burned out       Replace fuse and check wiring  220,
                                                                                            221
                                     Battery       Run down         Recharge                196,
                                                                                            197
                                                   Poor terminal con-  Tighten as required  196,
                                                   nections                                 197
                                                   Battery switch off  Turn on switch      42, 42
                                     Rear platform   Not latched    Latch securely          132
                                     hatch
                                     Starter compo-  Faulty         Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     nent                           Boat Dealer
                                     Remote control   Not in neutral posi-  Move remote control lever to   44
                                     lever         tion             neutral position
                                     Throttle/shift pad-  Squeezed  Release
                                     dle (212SD /                                            47
                                     212XD)
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor turns   switch (except for  place      switch                   41
                         over/engine   212SD / 212XD)
                         does not    Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  150
                         start
                                                   Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer





                                                                                             212]]></page><page Index="222"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 213  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Crankcase    Filled with fuel  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                         tor turns                                  Boat Dealer
                         over/engine               Filled with water  Have serviced by Yamaha
                         does not                                   Boat Dealer              —
                         start
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged or water   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   collected        Boat Dealer
                         Warning is   Over temperature  Jet intake clogged  Clean           214
                         displayed   warning*      Cooling system   Clean
                                                   clogged                                  173
                                     Low oil pressure   Oil pressure dropped  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning*                       Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  150
                                     Check engine   Faulty sensors  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning                        Boat Dealer
                         Engine runs   Fuel        Empty            Refill as soon as possible   150
                         irregularly or            Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha
                         stalls                    ed               Boat Dealer              —
                                     Fuel filter   Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dirt present  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                         Boat speed   Cavitation   Jet intake  clogged  Clean               214
                         too slow or   Engine overheat*  Jet intake clogged   Clean         214
                         loses power
                                                   Cooling system   Clean                   173
                                                   clogged
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged          Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.



                        213]]></page><page Index="223"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 214  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                             Emergency procedures
                        Jet pump clean-out procedure
                             WARNING
                                                                1                             1
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        nore any of the following:                       2          2
                         Turn off and remove both main switch
                          keys, remove the clip from the engine
                          shut-off switch, and wait for all move-
                          ment to stop  before removing the  ac-
                          cess port caps.
                                                              1  Retaining cord
                         Never override the interlocks to run the  2  Strap eye
                          engines with the rear platform hatch
                          open.                               (4) While holding the  handle and  pushing
                         The impellers have sharp  edges.  Be   down, turn the access port cap counter-
                          careful when reaching into jet pump ar-  clockwise until the “SET” mark is aligned
                          eas.                                   with the slot, and then lift the cap by the
                                                                 handle.
                        If weeds or debris get caught in the intakes or
                        impellers, cavitation can occur, and though  NOTICE
                        the engine speed rises, forward thrust will de-   Do not lift or pull the cap with the retain-
                        crease. If this condition is allowed to contin-  ing cord.
                        ue, jet pump damage can occur and the   Set the cap where it cannot be acciden-
                        engines may overheat and seize. If there is  tally knocked overboard.
                        any sign that a  jet intake or impeller is
                        clogged  with  weeds or debris, follow this
                        clean-out procedure.
                        (1) Turn off and remove the main switch key,
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                            switch, and  wait for all movement  to
                            stop.
                        (2) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            132.)                                   1
                        (3) Check that the retaining cord is securely                   2
                            attached to the  access  port cap  and
                            strap eye.                        1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot









                                                                                             214]]></page><page Index="224"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 215  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery



                                  1



                                                                                          1


                                                                    3
                                                                                        2


                        1  Access port cap                    1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot
                        (5) Remove any weeds or debris from the  3  Edge of the access port
                            drive shaft, impeller, pump housing, and
                            jet thrust nozzle. If you cannot remove  (8) Check that the cap is perpendicular to
                            the debris, consult a Yamaha Boat Deal-  the centerline of the boat. Pull the handle
                            er.                                  forcefully  to make sure  that the cap is
                        (6) To reinstall the access port  cap, first  locked securely. If a strong pull will move
                            clean off any sand or other foreign matter  the access port cap, it is not locked se-
                            from the cap or port surfaces. Apply a  curely—the cap could be forced out by
                            light coat of Yamalube Waterproof Ma-  water pressure during operation.
                            rine Grease (P/N: ACC-GREAS-10-CT), if
                            available, to the seal of the access port
                            cap. If grease is not available, apply the
                            grease  during  the  post-operation
                            checks.                               1
                        (7) Insert the cap so that the “SET” mark is
                            aligned  with  the slot, and then while
                            pushing the handle turn the cap clock-
                            wise until the “SET” mark is aligned with
                            the edge of the access port.
                                                              1  Perpendicular to the centerline of the boat

                                                              (9) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Be sure the access port caps are locked
                                                              securely in place. Otherwise, the caps
                                                              could be forced out of the access ports by
                                                              water pressure,  causing loss of  perfor-
                                                              mance and possible damage.



                        215]]></page><page Index="225"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 216  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                        TIP:
                        The rear platform hatch has interlocks to shut
                        off the engines should the hatch be acciden-
                        tally opened during operation.  The engines
                        will not restart unless the hatch is closed and
                        latched.

                        Raising the shift gates (212SE / 212SD /
                        212XE / 212XD)                         1
                        If the shift actuator malfunctions and the shift
                        gates remain in the lowered position, the boat  1  Manual release lever
                        will not be able to move forward.
                        After raising the shift gates so that the boat  (5) Use a screwdriver or similar tool to re-
                        can move forward, immediately return to  move the shift rod covers.
                        shore and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer ser-
                        vice the boat.                                    1
                        To raise the shift gates:
                        (1) Stop the engines and remove the clip
                            from the engine shut-off switch.
                        (2) Open the front underseat storage com-
                            partment. (See page 127.)
                        (3) Remove the nuts, and then remove the
                            shift motor cover.


                                1                             1  Shift rod cover

                                                              (6) Slide the shift rods to port (left) to raise
                                                                 the shift gates to the forward position.

                                                       2




                                                                                  1
                        1  Shift motor cover
                        2  Nut

                        (4) Move  the manual release levers of  the
                            shift motors to the manual operation po-
                            sition.
                                                              1  Shift rod




                                                                                             216]]></page><page Index="226"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 217  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                                                              (4) Move the manual release levers of the
                                      1                 1        shift motors to the electronic operation
                                                                 position.

                                                              Power steering system will not
                                                              operate (212SD / 212XD)
                                                              If the power steering system malfunctions, a
                                                              warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                                                              play and the direction of the boat cannot be
                                                              changed even if the steering wheel is turned.
                        1  Shift gate

                                                                                     S
                                                                        S
                        TIP:                                            SEE    S S   SW W
                         When the manual release levers are in the
                                                                       Check Engine !
                          manual operation position, the shift gates
                                                                       Stop steering.
                                                                       Open service valve of pump. Move cylinder to center  NEXT
                          cannot be moved to the neutral or reverse  0 rpmpm  position. Using the two remote control levers, perform the boat  x1000 1000
                                                              0
                                                                r
                                                                                               x
                                                                       steering operation by the engine speed difference.
                                                                       Consult YAMAHA dealer.  QUIT
                          positions.
                         When the manual release levers are in the
                          manual operation  position, the boat  will
                                                                   Blowerr
                                                                                               o
                                                                                              h
                                                               B Bilgee  Bl owe         N Navav  A Anchor r
                                                                lg
                                                                                             nc
                                                                i
                          move forward even if the remote control le-
                          vers are moved to the reverse position.
                         212SD / 212XD: When the manual release  Manually point the jet thrust nozzles in the
                          levers are in the manual operation position,  straight-ahead direction, and then use  the
                          the boat  will move forward even if the  difference in the amount of throttle for the
                          DRiVE  mode is activated and  the throt-  port and starboard engines to steer the boat
                          tle/shift paddle (left) is pulled.  and return to shore. After returning to shore,
                                                              have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.
                        (7) Move  the manual release levers of  the  TIP:
                            shift motors to the electronic operation  If  a malfunction  is  detected for the power
                            position.                         steering system, the maximum engine speed
                        If the shift gates cannot be raised using the  will be limited to approximately 5000 rpm.
                        preceding procedure, the shift gates can be
                        raised manually from the water.       To point the jet thrust nozzles in the straight-
                        To raise the shift gates from the water:  ahead direction:
                        (1) Follow the above steps 1–4 for “To raise  (1) Stop the engines  and remove the clip
                            the shift gates”.                    from the engine shut-off switch.
                        (2) Enter the water and move to the rear of  (2) Open the rear underseat storage com-
                            the boat.                            partment (starboard). (See page 128.)
                        (3) Raise the shift gates to the forward posi-  (3) Open the bulkhead cover.
                            tion.
                        217]]></page><page Index="227"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 218  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                              (6) Move the cable  holder manually  and
                                                                 align the end of the rod with the edge of
                                                                 the bracket.






                                                         1



                        1  Bulkhead cover

                        (4) Turn the  service  valve on the steering  1        2
                            pump in the direction shown in the illus-  1  Cable holder
                            tration.                          2  Edge of the bracket

                                                              (7) Tighten the service valve.

                                                              To change the steering direction of the boat:
                                                              Activate the running mode and use the differ-
                                                              ence in the amount of throttle for the port and
                                                              starboard engines.
                                                              Turning to port

                                    1

                        1  Service valve
                                                                                      F
                        (5) Open the cabin underseat storage com-
                            partment (starboard), and then open the                   N
                            box to access the steering cylinder.                      R









                                           1




                        1  Steering cylinder


                                                                                             218]]></page><page Index="228"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 219  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                        Turning to starboard                  (2) Connect  one  end of the negative  (–)
                                                                 jumper cable to the negative (–) terminal
                                                                 of the booster battery.
                                                              (3) Connect the other end of the negative (–)
                                                                 jumper cable to an engine hanger.
                                                F
                                                                 NOTICE: Be sure all connections are
                                                N                secure and correct before attempting
                                                                 to start  the engine. Any wrong con-
                                                R
                                                                 nection may damage  the  electrical
                                                                 system.
                                                              AR210 / SX210
                        TIP:
                                                               3              1
                        Because the port and starboard engines op-
                        erate at the same engine speed when the sin-                         2
                        gle lever mode or DRiVE mode is activated,
                        the difference in the amount of throttle for the
                        engines cannot be used to steer the boat.
                                                                                    4
                        Jump-starting
                             WARNING                                                5
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-  1  Negative (–) jumper cable
                        nore any of the following:            2  Positive (+) jumper cable
                         If the blowers will not operate, ventilate  3  Engine hanger
                          the engine compartment by opening the  4  Booster battery
                          engine hood for several minutes before  5  Starter battery
                          attempting a jump-start.
                         Do not connect the negative (–) jumper
                          cable to the negative (–) terminal of the
                          dead  battery. Sparks could ignite bat-
                          tery or fuel vapors, which could cause
                          an explosion.
                        If the  boat battery  runs down,  the engines
                        can be started in an emergency using a 12-
                        volt booster battery and jumper cables.
                        To connect the jumper cables:
                        (1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the
                            dead battery to the positive (+) terminal
                            of the booster battery with the positive
                            (+) jumper cable.



                        219]]></page><page Index="229"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 220  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        Except for AR210 / SX210              (2) Unfasten the band.

                                         1
                                                        2
                                  3
                                                                               1
                                               4

                                              5

                        1  Negative (–) jumper cable
                                                              1  Band
                        2  Positive (+) jumper cable
                        3  Engine hanger
                                                              (3) Remove the fuse box from the air filter
                        4  Booster battery
                                                                 case by pulling the fuse box toward the
                        5  Starter battery
                                                                 bow.
                                                              (4) While pushing both sides of the fuse box
                        (4) Start the engine, and then disconnect the
                                                                 cover inward, pull the cover toward the
                            jumper cables by  reversing  the above
                                                                 bow and remove it.
                            steps. NOTICE: Do not turn the main
                            switch key for more than 5 seconds. If
                            the engine does not start in 5 seconds,
                            release the main switch key and  try
                            again after  15 seconds. Continuous
                            cranking for more than 5 seconds will
                            discharge the battery and the engine
                            will not start. The starter motor may
                            also be damaged if they are engaged
                            continuously for more than 5 seconds.      1


                        Fuse replacement (AR210 / SX210)      1  Fuse box cover
                             WARNING
                        Do not use  fuses  of a higher amperage
                        than recommended. Substitution with  a
                        fuse that has an improper rating can cause
                        extensive electrical system  damage  and
                        possible fire.
                        If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper
                        fuse.
                        To replace a fuse:
                        (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 126.)

                                                                                             220]]></page><page Index="230"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 221  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery


                            12 3      4       5     6           Fuse amperage:
                                                                  Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Fuel pump fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Main relay drive fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Main fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                     8       7
                                                                  Battery fuse:
                        1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                                                                    30 A
                        2  Fuel pump fuse
                                                                  Accessory fuse:
                        3  Main relay drive fuse
                                                                    20 A
                        4  Main fuse
                        5  Fuse puller                        (7) Install the fuse box cover.
                        6  Battery fuse
                                                              (8) If the accessory fuse was replaced, in-
                        7  Spare fuse
                                                                 stall the accessory fuse holder.
                        8  Unused fuse
                                                              (9) Install the fuse box to the air filter case.
                                                              (10) Fasten the band.
                        (5) When replacing the accessory fuse, re-
                                                              (11) Close the engine hood.
                            move the accessory fuse holder. (Open
                            the rear underseat storage compartment
                                                              Fuse replacement
                            [port] to access the accessory fuse. [See
                                                              (except for AR210 / SX210)
                            page 129.])
                                                                  WARNING
                                   2                          Do not use fuses  of a higher amperage
                                                              than recommended. Substitution with  a
                                                              fuse that has an improper rating can cause
                                                              extensive electrical system  damage and
                                                              possible fire.
                                                  1
                                                              If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper
                                                              fuse.
                                                              To replace a fuse:
                                                              (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 126.)
                        1  Accessory fuse holder
                                                              (2) While pushing both sides of the fuse box
                        2  Accessary fuse
                                                                 cover inward, pull the cover toward the
                        (6) Replace the blown fuse with the spare  bow and remove it.
                            fuse of the correct amperage by using
                            the fuse puller.





                        221]]></page><page Index="231"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 222  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        3-star models                         212 / 212S
                                                                 12 3       4      5     6



                                                1






                                                                           8      7
                        1  Fuse box cover                     1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                                                              2  Fuel pump fuse
                        4-star models                         3  Main relay drive fuse
                                                              4  Main fuse
                                                              5  Fuse puller
                                                              6  Battery fuse
                                                              7  Spare fuse
                                                1             8  Unused fuse
                                                              212SE (4-star model)
                                                                 1 23       4  5       6 7



                        1  Fuse box cover                                                   8
                                                                                            9


                                                                                            8
                                                                          11      10

                                                              1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                                                              2  Fuel pump fuse
                                                              3  Main relay drive fuse
                                                              4  Main fuse
                                                              5  Spare fuse
                                                              6  Fuse puller
                                                              7  Battery fuse
                                                              8  Screw
                                                              9  BCU (SCU) fuse
                                                              10 Spare fuse
                                                              11 Unused fuse




                                                                                             222]]></page><page Index="232"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 223  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                        212SE (3-star model) / 212SD / 212XE /
                        212XD                                   Fuse amperage:
                                                                  Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                            1 23      4   5      6
                                                                    10 A
                                                                  Fuel pump fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                                                       7          Main relay drive fuse:

                                                       8            10 A
                                                                  Main fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                       7          Battery fuse:
                                             9                      30 A
                                                                  BCU (SCU) fuse (212SE / 212SD /
                        1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                        2  Fuel pump fuse                         212XE / 212XD):
                        3  Main relay drive fuse                    50 A
                        4  Main fuse                              Accessory fuse:
                        5  Spare fuse                               50 A
                        6  Fuse puller                              30 A
                        7  Screw                                    20 A
                        8  BCU (SCU) fuse
                                                                    10 A
                        9  Spare fuse
                                                              TIP:
                        (3) Replace the blown fuse with the spare  When replacing the BCU (SCU) fuse, remove
                            fuse of the correct amperage by using  the screws, and then remove the fuse. Install
                            the fuse puller.                  the spare fuse, and then tighten the screws.

                                                              (4) Install the fuse box cover.
                                                              (5) Close the engine hood.























                        223]]></page><page Index="233"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 224  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        Engine compartment
                                                                Fuse amperage:
                        Open the engine hood. (See page 126.)
                                                                  Audio fuse:
                        212SE / 212SD
                                                                    60 A
                                                                  EPS1 fuse (212SD / 212XD):
                                                                    60 A
                                 1                                EPS2 fuse (212SD / 212XD):
                                                                    60 A
                                                                  Ballast fuse (212XE / 212XD):
                                    2                               60 A

                                   3
                                                              Rear underseat storage compartment
                                                              (port)
                        1  Audio fuse                         Open the rear underseat storage compart-
                        2  EPS1 fuse (212SD)                  ment (port). (See page 129.)
                        3  EPS2 fuse (212SD)                  212 / 212S
                        212XE / 212XD                                 8      1    2   3    4
                                                      3
                                    4



                                                                            7     6   5
                          1
                                       2
                                                              1  Display/BiColor Light/(Switch Panel) fuse
                                                              2  Buzzer/Audio Controller/USB/(Switch Panel)
                        1  EPS1 fuse (212XD)                    fuse
                        2  EPS2 fuse (212XD)                  3  Horn fuse
                        3  Ballast fuse                       4  Bilge pump fuse
                        4  Audio fuse                         5  Docking light fuse
                                                              6  Audio Control Unit fuse
                                                              7  Power port fuse














                                                                                             224]]></page><page Index="234"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 225  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Trouble recovery

                        212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD
                                                                Fuse amperage:
                                8      1    2   3    4            Display/BiColor Light/(Switch Panel)
                                                                  fuse (212 / 212S):
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Buzzer/Audio Controller/USB/(Switch
                                                                  Panel) fuse (212 / 212S):
                                                                    20 A
                                      7          6    5
                                                                  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller
                                                                  fuse (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD):
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Power port/USB fuse (212SE /
                        1  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller fuse
                                                                  212SD / 212XE / 212XD):
                        2  Power port/USB fuse
                        3  Horn fuse                                20 A
                        4  Bilge pump fuse                        Horn fuse:
                        5  Power port fuse                          7.5 A
                        6  USB fuse                               Bilge pump fuse:
                        7  Power distribution module fuse           4 A
                        8  Fuse box                               Power port fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Audio Control Unit fuse (212 / 212S):
                                                                    20 A
                                                                  Docking light fuse (212 / 212S):
                                                                    7.5 A
                                                                  USB fuse (212SE / 212SD / 212XE /
                                                                  212XD):
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Power distribution module fuse
                                                                  (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD):
                                                                    20 A


                                                              Running on one engine
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Do not operate the boat above a no-wake
                                                              speed with just one engine.
                                                              Severe engine damage could result be-
                                                              cause water can flood the non-operating
                                                              engine through the water intake.

                                                              If one engine becomes inoperative, the prop-
                                                              erly running engine can be used to return to


                        225]]></page><page Index="235"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 226  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        shore. Operate at a no-wake speed to pre-
                        vent water from flooding the non-operating
                        engine  through  the water intake. The no-
                        wake mode can be used for  this purpose.
                        (See page 64, 73.)

                        Towing the boat
                                                                   1
                             WARNING
                         The  operator of the  towing boat must
                          keep  speed to a minimum  and avoid
                                                              1  Bow eye
                          traffic or obstacles which could be  a
                          hazard to either boat.
                         The towing line should be long enough
                          so the towed boat will not collide with
                          the towing boat when slowing down.
                        The boat should be towed only if it becomes
                        inoperative.
                        The towing rope should be long enough so
                        that the boat will not collide with the towing
                        boat when slowing  down. A good rule of
                        thumb is a tow rope which is three times the
                        combined length of the towing boat and the
                        boat.
                        Tow the boat using the bow eye only. Tow the
                        boat at a no-wake speed. NOTICE: Do not
                        tow the boat at speed fast enough to leave
                        a wake (8 km/h, 5 mph). Severe engine
                        damage could result because water can
                        flood the non-operating engines through
                        the water intakes.

















                                                                                             226]]></page><page Index="236"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 227  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Consumer information

                                                   Limited warranty































































                        227]]></page><page Index="237"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 228  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                               Consumer information


































































                                                                                             228]]></page><page Index="238"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 229  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Consumer information

                                       YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.)











                          Keep your Yamaha Boat protected even after   sonable expenses you incur because your
                          the 1-year warranty coverage provisions  Yamaha needs covered service: replace-
                          expire with genuine Yamaha Extended Service  ment vehicle rental, emergency towing,
                          (Y.E.S.).                             phone calls, even food and lodging when
                                                                you are away from home. This superb cov-
                          Y.E.S. is designed and administered by  erage goes into effect when you purchase
                          Yamaha Motor Corporation to provide maxi-  Y.E.S., so it applies to any warranty repairs
                          mum owner satisfaction.You get uninterrupted
                                                                as well as covered repairs during your entire
                          factory-backed coverage for extra peace of
                                                                Y.E.S. plan period.
                          mind.
                                                              • Y.E.S. coverage is honored at any autho-
                          • Y.E.S. is flexible. You choose the plan that’s
                                                                rized Yamaha dealer nationwide.
                           right for you: 12 months, 24 months,  36
                           months, or up to 48 months on certain mod-  • Y.E.S. coverage is transferable to a new
                           els   beyond the 1-year warranty coverage pe-  owner if you sell or trade-in. That can make
                           riod. That means you can get up to 5 years   your Yamaha Boat much more valuable!
                           of coverage on the power train, controls, and
                           other components to match the comforting   This excellent Y.E.S. plan coverage is only
                           5-year standard protection on the hull.  available to Yamaha owners like you, and only
                                                              while your Yamaha is still within the first year
                          • Y.E.S. is designed and administered by the   of the  Yamaha Limited  Warranty period. So
                           same Yamaha people who handle your war-  visit your authorized Yamaha dealer to get all
                           ranty–and it shows in the comprehensive  the facts. He can show you how easy it is to
                           coverage benefits. There are no limitations   protect your investment with Yamaha Extended
                           on hours of use. Coverage isn’t limited to   Service. We urge you to act now. You’ll get
                           “moving parts” or the “drive train” like many  the excellent benefits of TRIP coverage right
                           other plans. And Y.E.S. covers manufactur-  away, and you’ll rest easy knowing you’ll have
                           ing defects just like the warranty. See the   strong factory-backed protection even after
                           sample contract at your Yamaha dealer to   your Yamaha Limited  Warranty expires. See
                           see how comforting uninterrupted factory-  your dealer today!
                           backed protection can be.
                                                              A special note:
                          • You don’t have to pay anything for cov-
                           ered repairs. There’s no deductible to pay,  If visiting your dealer isn’t convenient, contact
                           and repairs aren’t “prorated.” You don’t have  Yamaha with your Primary ID number or Hull
                           any “out-of-pocket” expenses for covered  Identification Number. We’ll be happy to help
                           repairs.                           you get the Y.E.S. coverage you need.
                          • In addition,  Travel and Recreation      Yamaha Service Marketing
                           Interruption Protection (TRIP) is included  P.O. Box 6555
                           at no extra cost. TRIP gives you up to $250   Cypress, CA 90630
                           reimbursement per occurrence for any rea-  1-(866)-YES-EXTD
                                                                     (1-866-937-3983)




                        229]]></page><page Index="239"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 230  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                               Consumer information

                                                   Sample float plan
                        Leave a float plan with a responsible person on shore before boating. The example below can
                        be copied and used.


                                                     FLOAT PLAN
                                                   VESSEL INFORMATION
                           BOAT MAKE:      Yamaha              MOTOR TYPE:  Jet
                           MODEL:
                           LENGTH:                             REGISTRATION NO:
                           DECK COLOR:                         HULL COLOR:
                                                       PASSENGER
                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #2:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #3:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #4:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                                                  DEPARTURE INFORMATION
                           POINT OF DEPARTURE:                 DATE/TIME:
                           TOW VEHICLE            LICENSE:     TRAILER LICENSE:
                           MAKE / MODEL
                                                 DESTINATION INFORMATION
                           DESTINATION:       LORAN OR GPS COORDINATES:   INTENDED ACTIVITY:




                           EXPECTED RETURN    DATE:                       TIME:
                           LOCAL U.S. COAST GUARD PHONE #:
                           NOTES:               HULL COLOR:

                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:




                                                                                             230]]></page><page Index="240"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 231  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Index

                        A                                     Bimini top, storing in the upright
                        Access port cap check .......................... 165  position (SX210 / 212) ........................ 147
                        Accessory outlet .......................... 51, 69, 96  Bimini top (SX210 / 212) ........................ 146
                        Additional equipment                  Bimini top, trailering
                          recommendations................................. 20  (AR210 / 212X / 212S) ........................ 146
                        Anchor light (except for SX210 / 212).... 135  Bimini top, trailering (SX210 / 212)......... 149
                        Anchor light (SX210 / 212) ..................... 135  Blower checks
                        Anchor storage compartment................ 126  (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 168
                        Anchoring............................................... 185  Blower switch check (AR210 / SX210)... 168
                        Approval labels of emission control   Boarding from a dock or landing jetty.... 183
                          certificate................................................ 3  Boarding from the bow .......................... 183
                        Audio control keypad............................... 51  Boarding from the water ........................ 183
                                                              Boat characteristics ................................. 21
                        B                                     Boat control functions.............................. 41
                        Backing your trailer................................ 189  Boating with passengers........................ 182
                        Basic stain guide.................................... 195  Bow ladder............................................. 136
                        Battery care (AR210 / SX210) ................ 196
                        Battery care                          C
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 197  Check engine warning................ 62, 93, 119
                        Battery check......................................... 167  Cleaning the boat................................... 193
                        Battery switch (AR210 / SX210)............... 42  Communication error warning.......... 94, 120
                        Battery switches                      Controller .................................................98
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) .................. 42  Cooling water pilot outlet check ............ 173
                        Beaching................................................ 184  Crossing wakes and swells.................... 185
                        Bilge pump indicator light........................ 69  Cruise assist................................. 65, 72, 98
                        “BILGE” switch ........................................ 96  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” button.................... 98
                        Bilge water check................................... 167  Cruising limitations................................... 17
                        Bilge water, draining .............................. 155
                        Bilge water, draining on land ................. 155  D
                        Bilge water, draining on water ............... 156  Depth warning............................ 64, 94, 120
                        Bimini top (except for SX210 / 212) ....... 142  Docking.................................................. 183
                        Bimini top, installing                Drain plug check ....................................167
                          (AR210 / 212X / 212S) ........................ 146  Draining the bilge water ...........................67
                        Bimini top, installing (SX210 / 212) ........ 149  DRiVE mode (212SD / 212XD) ............... 104
                        Bimini top, removing                  Driver’s seat (AR210 / SX210)................ 122
                          (AR210 / 212X / 212S) ........................ 146  Driver’s seat
                        Bimini top, removing (SX210 / 212) ....... 149  (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 123
                        Bimini top, setting up                Driver’s side console compartment ....... 130
                          (AR210 / 212X / 212S) ........................ 142  Driving your boat....................................175
                        Bimini top, setting up (SX210 / 212) ...... 146  E
                        Bimini top, storing                   Emergency procedures.......................... 214
                          (AR210 / 212X / 212S) ........................ 144  Emission control information ..................... 3
                        Bimini top, storing in the fully      Enclosed head compartment................. 129
                          collapsed position (SX210 / 212)........ 148
                                                              Engine break-in (AR210 / SX210)........... 159



                        231]]></page><page Index="241"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 232  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                         Index

                        Engine break-in                       Home screen....................................78, 105
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 159  Horn check............................................. 171
                        Engine covers, removing and installing   “HORN” switch ........................................ 96
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 201  Horn switch .............................................. 67
                        Engine hood........................................... 126  Hull Identification Number (HIN)................. 1
                        Engine oil ............................................... 151
                        Engine oil level check............................. 166  I
                        Engine oil requirement ........................... 151  Identification number records .................... 1
                        Engine serial numbers................................ 1  J
                        Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check..... 172  Jet intake checks ................................... 165
                        Engine shut-off switch ............................. 41  Jet pump clean-out procedure .............. 214
                        Engine shut-off switch check................. 172  Joystick, using ......................................... 97
                        Enjoy your boat responsibly..................... 28
                                                              Jump-starting......................................... 219
                        F                                     L
                        Fire extinguisher check.......................... 163  Labels, important ....................................... 7
                        Float mode............................................. 104  Labels, other ............................................15
                        Flushing the cooling system .................. 192  Labels, warning........................................ 11
                        Front underseat storage               Launching...............................................190
                          compartments .................................... 127  Learning to operate your boat................ 175
                        Front walk-through................................. 133  Leaving a dock....................................... 180
                        Fuel ........................................................ 150  Lifting .....................................................191
                        Fuel level check ..................................... 173  Light operation ......................................... 66
                        Fuel requirement .................................... 150  Limitations on who may operate the
                        Fuel system............................................ 199  boat.......................................................16
                        Fuel system checks ............................... 165  Limited warranty ....................................227
                        Fuse replacement                      Loading .................................................. 190
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 221
                                                              Long-term storage ................................. 199
                        G                                     Low fuel level warning................ 64, 94, 120
                        Generic warning....................................... 63  Low oil pressure warning ........... 62, 93, 119
                        Getting to know your boat ..................... 175  Low voltage warning ..............................120
                        Glossary, boat.......................................... 29  Lubrication ............................................. 199
                        Glove compartment (AR210 / SX210).... 131  M
                        Glove compartment                     Main components, location...................... 30
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 131  Main switch (except for 212 / 212S) ........ 44
                        Grease points......................................... 199
                                                              Main switches
                        H                                      (AR210 / SX210 / 212 / 212S)............... 43
                        Hazard information................................... 21  Maintenance........................................... 201
                        Helm controls                         Manufactured date label
                          (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD)........ 95  (AR210 / SX210) ..................................... 4
                        Helm controls (212X / 212S / 212)........... 68  Manufactured date label
                        Helm controls (AR210 / SX210) ............... 50  (except for AR210 / SX210) .................... 4
                        High voltage warning ............................. 120  Map screen .............................................. 78
                        Hitch....................................................... 188  Media screen............................................80


                                                                                             232]]></page><page Index="242"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 233  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                        Index

                        Multi-function display elements....... 74, 101  Required equipment................................. 20
                        Multi-function display unit           Reverse RPM control ................. 65, 73, 100
                          operation .................................. 52, 70, 97  Rules of the road......................................24
                                                              Running mode........................................ 104
                        N                                     Running on one engine .......................... 225
                        Navigation and anchor lights checks
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 170  S
                        Navigation and anchor lights switch   Sample float plan ................................... 230
                          check (AR210 / SX210)....................... 169  Screen tab bar ....................................... 102
                        Night operation ........................................ 22  Seats ...................................................... 121
                        No-wake mode ............................ 64, 73, 99  Setting screen .......................................... 87
                        No-wake mode/cruise assist switch........ 64  Side table ...............................................138
                                                              Single lever mode .................................. 104
                        O                                     Ski locker ...............................................127
                        Operation mode..................................... 104  Specifications (AR210 / SX210) ............. 207
                        Operational requirements ........................ 18  Specifications
                        Over temperature warning ......... 62, 93, 119  (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 209
                        Owner’s/operator’s manual ................... 201  Star labels (4-star models) ......................... 5
                                                              Starting the engines ............................... 175
                        P
                        Passenger’s seat                      “START/STOP” buttons
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 125  (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD)........ 44
                        Periodic maintenance chart ................... 203  Status indicator bar................................ 103
                        Post-launch checks ............................... 172  Steering.................................................... 47
                        Post-operation care ............................... 192  Steering system checks.........................162
                        Post-operation checks........................... 186  Stern ladder............................................ 137
                        Power steering system will not operate   Stopping the boat .................................. 182
                          (212SD / 212XD) ................................. 217  Stopping the engines............................. 179
                        Pre-launch checks ................................. 162  Storage compartments .......................... 126
                        Pre-operation check points ................... 162  Stowable table
                        Pre-operation checklist.......................... 160  (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 131
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number ...... 1  Swim platform........................................ 137
                                                              Switch circuit breakers............................. 67
                        R                                     Switch panel............................................. 96
                        Raising the shift gates               System control screen ............................. 86
                          (212SE / 212SD / 212XE / 212XD)...... 216
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    T
                          (port) ................................................... 129  Tachometers ............................................51
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    Throttle/shift paddles (212SD / 212XD) ... 47
                          (starboard) .......................................... 128  Throttle/shift paddles checks
                        Rear walk-through ................................. 133  (212SD / 212XD) ................................. 163
                        Remote control keypad............................ 69  Tilt lever.................................................... 48
                        Remote control keypad                 To get more boating safety information... 28
                          (except for AR210 / SX210) ................ 138  Towing the boat ..................................... 226
                        Remote control lever checks ................. 162  Trailering checklist ................................. 188
                        Remote control levers.............................. 44  Trailering the boat .................................. 188
                                                              Trip screen ......................................... 56, 79

                        233]]></page><page Index="243"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 234  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM



                                                                                         Index

                        Troubleshooting..................................... 212
                        Troubleshooting chart............................ 212
                        Turning the anchor light and bow light
                          on or off ................................................ 66
                        Turning the boat..................................... 180
                        Turning the courtesy light on or off.......... 66

                        V
                        Ventilating the engine compartment........ 67
                        W
                        Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                          setting up............................................ 140
                        Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                          setting up (212S / 212SE / 212SD /
                          212XE / 212XD) .................................. 141
                        Wakeboard tower
                          (except for SX210 / 212)..................... 140
                        Wakeboarding and water-skiing .............. 23
                        Walk-through ......................................... 133
                        Warnings ................................................ 117
                        Wet storage compartment ..................... 132
                        Windshield ............................................. 133
                        Y
                        YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                          (Y.E.S.)................................................ 229




























                                                                                             234]]></page><page Index="244"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F3R15.book  Page 1  Friday, May 14, 2021  11:12 AM










                        For your best ownership experience, think Genuine Yamaha!

                        Genuine Yamaha Parts – Genuine Yamaha replacement parts are the exact same
                        parts as the ones originally equipped on your vehicle, providing you with the
                        performance and durability you have come to expect. Why settle for aftermarket parts
                        that may not provide full confidence and satisfaction?

                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories – Yamaha only offers accessories that meet our
                        high standards for quality and performance. Buy with confidence, knowing your
                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories will fit right and perform right – right out of the box.

                        Yamalube – Take care of your Yamaha with legendary Yamalube oils, lubricants,
                        and care products. They’re formulated and approved by the toughest judges we
                        know: the Yamaha engineering teams that know your Yamaha from the inside out.

                        Genuine Yamaha Service Manuals – Get the same factory manual for your vehicle
                        that the technicians at your authorized Yamaha dealer use. Service manuals are
                        available through your Yamaha dealer or you can order them directly through
                        yamahapubs.com.

                        Genuine Yamaha products are available only from your Yamaha dealer.

                        Find out more at yamaha-motor.com]]></page></pages></Search>
